You are on page 1of 318

323-1211-310

SDH Transmission
TN-16X
Provisioning and Operations Procedures

Release 4.2 Standard March 1997


SDH Transmission
TN-16X
Provisioning and Operations Procedures

Document Number: 323-1211-310


Document Status: Standard
Product Release Number: Release 4.2
Date: March 1997

Copyright  1994 - 1997 Northern Telecom

Printed in England

The copyright of this document is the property of Northern Telecom. Without the written consent of Northern Telecom, given by
contract or otherwise, this document must not be copied, reprinted or reproduced in any material form, either wholly or in part, and
the contents of this document, or any methods or techniques available therefrom, must not be disclosed to any other person
whatsoever.

NORTHEN TELECOM CONFIDENTIAL: The information contained in this document is the property of Northern Telecom. Except
as specifically authorized in writing by Northern Telecom, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein
confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use same for
evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only.

So far as Northern Telecom is aware the contents of this document are correct. However, such contents have been obtained from
a variety of sources and Northern Telecom can give no warranty or undertaking and make no representation as to their accuracy.
In particular, Northern Telecom hereby expressly excludes liability for any form of consequential, indirect or special loss, and for
loss of data, loss of profits or loss of business opportunity, howsoever arising and whether sustained by the user of the information
herein or any third party arising out of the contents of this document.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


iii

Publication history
March 1997
Release 4.2 Standard introduces the following TN-16X features:
• 34Mbit/s unprotected tributary card which maps three 34Mbit/s
pleisochronous signals to a single AU4 signal.
• VC3 Drop and Continue
• Path Trace functionality at VC3 level which enables path overhead
validation at the signal termination point.
• OSI (Q3) interface extended to support 34M (or VC3) equipment
provisioning.

Recovery Procedures, 323-1211-545, Routine Maintenance Procedures,


323-1211-546 and Module Replacement Procedures, 323-1211-547 have
been combined into a single NTP Replacement and Recovery Procedures,
323-1211-547.

October 1996
Release 4.1 Standard includes the TN-16X features listed below for the
preliminary release.

One new NTP has been added to the document set; Planning and Ordering
Information 323-1211-152.

May 1996
Release 4.1 Preliminary introduces the following TN-16X features:
• Optical tributaries at the STM-1 rate with 1+1 protection
• OSI (Q3) interface (for STM-1o) to an external Operation System
Function
• A new OPC tool, Release installation utility, used during in-service
upgrades of the system software.
• The minimum time period for performance monitoring statistics is now 15
minutes

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


iv Publication history

April 1996
Release 3.1 Standard introduces the following TN-16X features:
• 1:N Linear protection shelf with extra traffic on the protection channel
• Orderwire on linear systems
• STM-16e Receiver and Transmitter interfaces
• Optical tributaries at the STM4 rate with 1+1 protection.
• External synchronisation interface at 2 MHz.
• OSI Q3 interface to an external Operation System Function.
One new NTP has been added to the document set; OSI (Q3) Interface
description 323-1211-191.

November 1995
Release 3 Standard introduces the following TN-16X features:
• High performance transmitters on ring and regenerator nodes
• Optical post amplifiers on ring and regenerator node
The Master Topical Index, 323-1211-002 and List of Terms, 323-1211-850
have been incorporated into the About the TN-16X Documentation Suite,
323-1211-090 NTP.

June 1995
Release 2 Standard introduces the following TN-16X features:
• VC4e tributary card supporting either 140Mbit/s pleisochronous or
STM1e SDH signals.
• Regenerator shelves for SP Ring configurations at 1557 and 1310 nm.
• Interoperability between TN-16X and TN-1X products at the OSI network
layer.
• Ring transmitter with 1310 nm optics.
Two new NTPs have been added to the document set; System expansion
procedures, 323-1211-224 and Common procedures, 323-1211-846.

December 1994
Release 1 Standard.

end of chapter

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


v

Contents
About this document xi
Audience xi
EMC conformance xi

Technical support and information xvii

Provisioning defaults 1-1


Alarm defaults 1-1
Data communications 1-1
Equipment/facility states 1-2
Provisioning of facilities and equipment 1-3
Equipment and facility defaults 1-4
Equipment defaults 1-4
Facility defaults 1-6
STM connection defaults 1-6
Protection-switching defaults 1-7
Protection-switching priority 1-7
Route diversity setting 1-7
Protection-switching mode 1-7
Protection scheme 1-7
Provisioning of user interface ports 1-7
Parallel telemetry 1-8
STM-16 optical power (OP) and laser bias current (LBC) 1-9
Performance thresholds 1-9
Facility performance-monitoring thresholds 1-10

Equipment procedures 2-1


Chapter task list 2-2
Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status 2-3
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment 2-6
Activating or deactivating a circuit pack 2-12
Adding a circuit pack to the system 2-16
Deleting a circuit pack from the system 2-19
Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups) 2-22
Provisioning equipment alarms 2-25
Common equipment and local environmental alarms 2-28
External (environmental) alarms 2-30
34M equipment alarms 2-30
STM-1e equipment alarms 2-31
VC4e equipment alarms 2-31
STM-4o equipment alarms 2-32
STM-1o equipment alarms 2-33

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


vi

ESI equipment alarms 2-34


STM-16 equipment alarms 2-34
Performing a shelf inventory 2-41
Listing the circuit packs on a shelf 2-43
Performing a shelf lamp test 2-45
Changing the shelf position number 2-46
Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter 2-47
Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier 2-49
Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier 2-51
Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a high performance
transmitter 2-53

Facility procedures 3-1


Chapter task list 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities 3-2
Displaying the Comms port performance statistics 3-7
Displaying the Comms routing tables 3-8
Displaying the nodes in the Comms network 3-9
Activating or deactivating a facility 3-10
Adding a facility to a network element 3-15
Deleting a facility from a network element 3-20
Changing the facility identifier 3-24
Changing the Comm facility area address 3-28
Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold 3-30
Setting the 34M, VC4 and STM-1e signal-degrade threshold 3-32
Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds 3-35
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen 3-37
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen 3-42
Provisioning the facility alarms 3-46
34M facility alarms 3-50
VC4 facility alarms 3-51
STM-1e facility alarms 3-51
ESI timing reference facility alarms 3-52
STM-1o facility alarms 3-53
STM-4o facility alarms 3-54
Comm facility alarms (CNET Port) 3-54
Comm facility alarms (SDCC Port) 3-55
STM-16 facility alarms 3-55
140 M facility alarms 3-57
Provisioning Comm facility ports 3-58
Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format
(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) 3-61
Changing an ESI timing reference frame format
(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) 3-63
Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO)
(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) 3-65
Changing an ESI timing distribution source 3-67
Changing an ESI primary or secondary input timing reference source 3-69
Operating or releasing a 34M, VC4, STM-1e, 140M, or STM-1o loopback 3-71
Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode 3-74

Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-1


Restrictions and limitations 4-1

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


vii

Master task list 4-2


Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration 4-3
Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring 4-7
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM 4-11
Scheduling an audit of configuration data 4-16
Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC 4-21
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM 4-25
Editing the ring name 4-32
Displaying the node map for a ring ADM node (through the command input area of the
network element user interface) 4-35

Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-1


Definitions: connection and configuration 5-1
Definitions: connection 5-1
Definition: configuration 5-2
Connection Manager tool 5-3
Provisioning connections 5-4
Defining a connection in the same span of control and the same configuration 5-4
Defining a connection across more than one span of control 5-5
Tributaries 5-6
Connection types 5-7
Timeslot assignment 5-7
Restrictions and limitations 5-7
Chapter task list 5-8
Displaying connections in the ring 5-9
Modifying the list of connections 5-16
Adding a connection 5-22
Connections across more than one span of control 5-23
Editing a connection 5-35
Deleting a connection 5-44
Scheduling an audit of connection data 5-48
Performing an audit of connection data 5-52
Performing a manual backup of connection data 5-57
Displaying the connection map for an ADM node (from the network element user
interface) 5-61

Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-1
Definitions: connection and configuration 6-1
Definitions: pipe 6-1
Definitions: connection 6-2
Definition: configuration 6-3
Connection Manager tool 6-4
Provisioning connections 6-5
34M tributaries 6-6
Connection types 6-6
Chapter task list 6-6
Displaying 34M connections in the ring 6-7
Adding a 34M connection 6-14
Recording connection data 6-15
Editing a 34M ring connection 6-24
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections 6-30
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections 6-37
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections 6-41
Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections 6-45

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


viii

Auditing path trace for VC3 connections 6-48


Auditing 34M connection data 6-52

Index 1

Figures
Figure 4-1 Sample of nodemap command output 4-36
Figure 5-1 A connection in a ring configuration 5-2
Figure 5-2 Same configuration, same span of control 5-4
Figure 5-3 One configuration, two spans of control 5-6
Figure 5-4 Connection data table 5-23
Figure 5-5 Sample output from the connmap command 5-62
Figure 6-1 A VC4 pipe in a ring configuration 6-2
Figure 6-2 A connection in a ring configuration 6-3
Figure 6-3 Connection data table 6-15

Tables
Table 1-1 Summary of facility states for each equipment state 1-2
Table 1-2 Summary of system actions for each equipment state 1-3
Table 1-3 Mapping positions for the telemetry output port (points 1 to 8) on the
TN-16X terminal 1-8
Table 1-4 Mapping positions for the telemetry output port (points 1 to 8) on the
TN-16X regenerator/optical amplifier shelf 1-9
Table 1-5 Facility performance monitoring threshold values 1-10
Table 2-1 Common equipment alarms 2-29
Table 2-2 External (environmental) alarms 2-30
Table 2-3 34M equipment alarms 2-30
Table 2-4 STM1e equipment alarms 2-31
Table 2-5 VC4e equipment alarms 2-31
Table 2-6 STM-4o Equipment Alarms 2-32
Table 2-7 STM-4o equipment alarms (Non provisionable) 2-33
Table 2-8 STM-1o equipment alarms 2-33
Table 2-9 ESI equipment alarms 2-34
Table 2-10 STM-16 equipment alarm points 2-35
Table 2-11 STM-16 regenerator equipment alarm points 2-39
Table 3-1 34M facility alarms 3-50
Table 3-2 VC4 facility alarms 3-51
Table 3-3 STM-1e facility alarms 3-51
Table 3-4 1.5Mbit/s ESI timing reference facility alarms 3-52
Table 3-5 2Mhz ESI timing reference facility alarms 3-53
Table 3-6 ESI timing reference facility alarms (non-provisionable) 3-53
Table 3-7 STM-1o facility alarms 3-53
Table 3-8 STM-4o facility alarms 3-54
Table 3-9 Comms facility alarms (CNET Port) 3-54
Table 3-10 Comms facility alarms (SDCC Port) 3-55
Table 3-11 STM-16 facility alarms 3-55
Table 3-12 140M facility alarms 3-57
Table 3-13 ESI DS1 line build-out selections 3-65
Table 4-1 Configuration tasks 4-2
Table 5-1 STM-16 architectures supported by the Configuration Manager tool 5-3
Table 6-1 STM-16 architectures supported by the Configuration Manager tool 6-4

Procedures
Procedure 2-1 Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status 2-3

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


ix

Procedure 2-2 Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment 2-6


Procedure 2-3 Activating or deactivating a circuit pack 2-13
Procedure 2-4 Adding a circuit pack to the system 2-17
Procedure 2-5 Deleting a circuit pack from the system 2-20
Procedure 2-6 Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups) 2-22
Procedure 2-7 Provisioning equipment alarms 2-26
Procedure 2-8 Performing a shelf inventory 2-41
Procedure 2-9 Listing the circuit packs on a shelf 2-43
Procedure 2-10 Performing a shelf lamp test 2-45
Procedure 2-11 Changing the shelf position number 2-46
Procedure 2-12 Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or
high performance transmitter 2-47
Procedure 2-13 Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier 2-49
Procedure 2-14 Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier 2-51
Procedure 2-15 Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a
high performance transmitter 2-53
Procedure 3-1 Displaying the status of facilities 3-2
Procedure 3-2 Displaying the Comms port performance statistics 3-7
Procedure 3-3 Displaying the Comms routing tables 3-8
Procedure 3-4 Displaying the nodes in the Comms network 3-9
Procedure 3-5 Activating or deactivating a facility 3-10
Procedure 3-6 Adding a facility to a network element 3-15
Procedure 3-7 Deleting a facility from a network element 3-20
Procedure 3-8 Changing the facility identifier 3-24
Procedure 3-9 Changing the Comm facility area address 3-28
Procedure 3-10 Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold 3-30
Procedure 3-11 Setting the STM-1e signal-degrade threshold 3-32
Procedure 3-12 Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds 3-35
Procedure 3-13 Querying other facilities from a Facility screen 3-37
Procedure 3-14 Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen 3-42
Procedure 3-15 Provisioning the facility alarms 3-46
Procedure 3-16 Provisioning Comm facility ports 3-58
Procedure 3-17 Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format 3-61
Procedure 3-18 Changing an ESI timing reference frame format 3-63
Procedure 3-19 Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO) 3-65
Procedure 3-20 Changing an ESI timing distribution source 3-67
Procedure 3-21 Changing an ESI primary or secondary input timing reference
source 3-69
Procedure 3-22 Operating or releasing a VC4, 34M, STM1o, STM1e or 140M
loopback 3-71
Procedure 3-23 Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode 3-74
Procedure 4-1 Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration 4-3
Procedure 4-2 Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring 4-7
Procedure 4-3 Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM 4-11
Procedure 4-4 Scheduling an audit of configuration data 4-17
Procedure 4-5 Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC 4-22
Procedure 4-6 Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM 4-26
Procedure 4-7 Editing the ring name 4-32
Procedure 4-8 Displaying the node map for a ring ADM node (through the command
input area of the network element user interface) 4-35
Procedure 5-1 Displaying connections in the ring 5-9
Procedure 5-2 Modifying the list of connections 5-17
Procedure 5-3 Adding a connection 5-24
Procedure 5-4 Editing a connection 5-35
Procedure 5-5 Deleting a connection 5-44

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


x

Procedure 5-6 Scheduling an audit of connection data 5-48


Procedure 5-7 Performing an audit of connection data 5-52
Procedure 5-8 Performing a manual backup of STM-1 connection data 5-58
Procedure 5-9 Displaying the STM-1 connection map for an ADM node (from the
network element user interface) 5-61
Procedure 6-1 Displaying connections in the ring 6-7
Procedure 6-2 Adding a 34M connection 6-16
Procedure 6-3 Editing a 34M ring connection 6-24
Procedure 6-4 Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections 6-31
Procedure 6-5 Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections 6-37
Procedure 6-6 Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections 6-41
Procedure 6-7 Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections 6-45
Procedure 6-8 Auditing path trace for VC3 connections 6-48

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


xi

About this document


This document contains the commands that are available from the OPC and
NE user interfaces to provide provisioning and operations procedures for the
TN-16X Network Element. Provisioning default values for TN-16X Ring
Add/Drop Multiplex (ADM) nodes are also provided.

If you are not familiar with the OPC or NE user interface screen layouts,
commands and menu hierarchies, see User Interfaces Description,
323-1211-301.

This document provides the procedures to:


• test facilities and circuit packs and assign traffic to them
• bring the shelf into working condition for testing or monitoring purposes
Audience
This document is intended for groups such as the following, who are
responsible for setting up the TN-16X Network Element user interface:
• network administrators
• field maintenance
• maintenance engineers
• system lineup and test (SLAT) engineers and technicians

EMC conformance

This product/product family complies with the provisions of


the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and the essential
protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
as amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, when it is
properly installed and maintained and when it is used for the
purposes for which it is intended.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


Code: AG5293
Issue: 2
Template: v4;961216

Declaration of Conformity
Suppliers Name & Address: Nortel Limited, of Doagh Road, Newtownabbey,
County Antrim, Northern Ireland, BT36 6XA
We hereby declare that the products identified in Section 1 comply with the standards listed in
Section 2 and fulfil our obligations under the EU Directives listed in Section 3.

Section 1 - Products Covered

Product Name Product Type


FibreWorld TN-16x ADM / LTE Permissible configurations which use TN-16x
Shelf Assembly NTFW50AA mounted in Rack
NTFW70AA or NTFW70AB

Section 2 - Standards Applied


The Product(s) described above is in conformity with the following standards:

Stds Standard Number Edition Subject of Standard


Ref
1 EN55022 1995 Emissions from IT Equipment
1 EN50082-1 1992 Generic Immunity
2 EN60950 1992 Safety of IT equipment
2 EN60825-1 1994 Safety of Laser Products

Section 3 - European Union Directives

Directive Abbreviated Directive Title Stds CE Marking


Number Ref Information
(if applicable)
89/336/EEC EMC Directive 1 n/a
92/31/EEC Amendment to EMC Directive n/a n/a
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive 2 97
93/68/EEC CE Marking Amending Directive n/a n/a

Section 4 - Authority of Issuer


Declaration Issued By: Peter Schuddeboom John Freebairn

Position of Issuer: AVP, Technology ITN Manufacturing Quality Manager

Signed:

Date:

The instructions for installation, use and maintenance form part of the product compliance and
must be observed.

This declaration has been made in accordance with ISO/IEC Guide 22, General criteria for suppliers' declaration of conformity
Code: AG5294
Issue: 2
Template: v4;961216

Declaration of Conformity
Suppliers Name & Address: Nortel Limited, of Doagh Road, Newtownabbey,
County Antrim, Northern Ireland, BT36 6XA
We hereby declare that the products identified in Section 1 comply with the standards listed in
Section 2 and fulfil our obligations under the EU Directives listed in Section 3.

Section 1 - Products Covered

Product Name Product Type


FibreWorld TN-16x REGEN Permissible configurations which use TN-16x
Shelf Assembly NTFW51AA mounted in Rack
NTFW71AA or NTFW71AB

Section 2 - Standards Applied


The Product(s) described above is in conformity with the following standards:

Stds Standard Number Edition Subject of Standard


Ref
1 EN55022 1995 Emissions from IT Equipment
1 EN50082-1 1992 Generic Immunity
2 EN60950 1992 Safety of IT equipment
2 EN60825-1 1994 Safety of Laser Products

Section 3 - European Union Directives

Directive Abbreviated Directive Title Stds CE Marking


Number Ref Information
(if applicable)
89/336/EEC EMC Directive 1 n/a
92/31/EEC Amendment to EMC Directive n/a n/a
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive 2 97
93/68/EEC CE Marking Amending Directive n/a n/a

Section 4 - Authority of Issuer


Declaration Issued By: Peter Schuddeboom John Freebairn

Position of Issuer: AVP, Technology ITN Manufacturing Quality Manager

Signed:

Date:

The instructions for installation, use and maintenance form part of the product compliance and
must be observed.

This declaration has been made in accordance with ISO/IEC Guide 22, General criteria for suppliers' declaration of conformity
xvii

Technical support and information


Nortel provides a comprehensive technical support service for its customers.
The Nortel Service Desk may be contacted between the hours of 8 30 am and
5 pm (UK local time), Monday to Friday, using the following FAX or
telephone numbers:
United Kingdom
Freephone: 0800 626 881
Telephone 0181 361 4693
FAX: 0181 945 3456
International
Tel: +44 181 361 4693
FAX: +44 181 945 3456

Access to assistance from the Customer Service Desk 24-hour helpline can be
provided and is subject to a suitable Support Agreement being in place.

To discuss Technical Support services, please contact the Technical Support


Hotline on 0181 945 3525.
end of chapter

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1

1-1

Provisioning defaults 1-
The provisioning default values for TN-16X terminal, regenerator and ring
ADM shelves are provided in this chapter. Depending on user requirements,
the default values can be changed according to the procedures provided in this
document.

When provisioning data is changed, the changes are journalled to the


non-volatile storage (NVS) on the maintenance interface (MI). Following a
restart, NVS updates are inhibited for a period of five minutes. If provisioning
data is changed during this five-minute period and then a second restart is
done, the provisioning changes will be lost unless a manual database backup
is performed prior to the second restart. A manual database backup can be
performed through the network element user interface (refer to Data
Administration Procedures, 323-1201-304).

To change performance monitoring defaults, refer to Performance


Monitoring Procedures, 323-1211-520.

For initial commissioning of a system, refer to Commissioning and Site


Testing Procedures, 323-1211-220.

Alarm defaults
By default, the alarm status of each facility and equipment alarm is set to ON.

Data communications
Each TN-16X network element supports data communications over the SDH
section data communications channels (SDCCs) and the control network
(CNet) local area network. When the system is powered up, SDCCs and CNet
ports are provisioned by default according to the system configuration and
automatically reprovisioned when related system parameters are changed.
Manual provisioning of SDCCs and control network ports is therefore only
necessary if the default settings are inappropriate.

After a shelf restart or reboot the provisioning values of SDCCs 1 to 3 return


to their default settings. Therefore, if the default setting for any of these
SDCCs is inappropriate, manual reprovisioning is required after a shelf restart
or reboot. All other SDCCs retain their provisioning over these events,
provided the provisioning data has been backed up to the OPC.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1-2 Provisioning defaults

Equipment/facility states
A facility or an equipment can be in one of three states at any given time:
• In-Service (IS)
• Out-Of-Service (OOS)
• Null
These primary states are defined as follows:
• In-service (IS): In this state, all alarms, protection switching and
performance monitoring are in the normal operating state. The in-service
state is initiated with the “ChgState IS” command and is used for circuit
packs and facilities which have been tested and are ready for traffic
assignment.
• Out-of-service (OOS): For an equipment or facility which is in the OOS
state, no alarms are reported and both protection switching and
performance monitoring are inhibited. The OOS state is achieved through
the “ChgState OOS” command and is used when maintenance action is
being taken on the equipment or facility. For example, when initiating a
loopback, the facility must first be placed OOS.
• Null: This state is implemented using the “delete” command. In the null
state, the facility and eqiupment are completely removed from the system
software. In other words, from a software point of view, the facility or
equipment no longer exists.
The following table presents a summary of possible states for a facility with
respect to the state of the equipment on which it resides.
Table 1-1
Summary of facility states for each equipment state

Equipment states Possible facility states

NULL NULL

OOS OOS

IS IS/OOS

Note: Alarms are generated only when equipment is in the IS state.

The following table presents a summary of system actions that are applicable
for each primary state.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Provisioning defaults 1-3

Table 1-2
Summary of system actions for each equipment state
1
System actions Null OOS In-service

Change of state logs Y Y Y

Configuration data present Y Y Y

Card LED operate N Y Y

HMI/Baylamp alarms N N Y

Alarm log reports N N Y

Man. Prot. Swit. enabled N N Y

Auto. Prot. Swit. enabled N N Y

Bay audible alarms N N Y

E2A Telemetry alarms N N Y

Provisioning of facilities and equipment


When a new system is powered up, the auto-provisioning feature of the
TN-16X system automatically provisions all the equipment, placing all
equipment and facilities in the IS state. In this state, protection switching,
performance monitoring, and alarm reporting are all enabled.

Note: Do not remove circuit packs during autoprovisioning until the


software has completed its initialization. Removing circuit packs during
autoprovisioning may result in circuit packs not being provisioned because
they have not been detected by the software.

When the circuit pack is inserted into a subrack slot, one of the following
events will occur:
1 The auto-provisioning feature of the TN-16X system provisions the circuit
pack and all its facilities, placing them in the IS state.
2 An alarm signals an auto-provisioning mismatch. This alarm is generated
if a circuit pack is inserted into a slot dedicated for some other circuit pack.
3 An alarm signals a circuit pack mismatch. This alarm is raised if a circuit
pack is inserted into any shelf slot other than its assigned slot or slots. The
software recognizes when a circuit pack of the wrong type is installed in a
slot. This alarm is also generated if a tributary circuit pack is inserted into
a slot that has already been provisioned for some other type of tributary.
For example, an STM-1 must not be inserted into a slot already

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1-4 Provisioning defaults

provisioned for an STM-4o interface circuit pack. (To reassign the


tributary slot to another type of tributary, you must first manually
deprovision the slot, that is, delete the facilities and equipment.)
Note: There is an exception to this rule. When the orderwire circuit pack is
inserted into slot 40, which is reserved for the ESI carrier, no alarm is
raised, even though this is a circuit pack mismatch. However, the red
circuit pack LED will light. The orderwire circuit pack will not be
autoprovisioned and therefore will not appear on a shelf inventory screen
or any other user interface screen. In addition, the orderwire services will
not function.

4 An alarm signals a quadrant mismatch. This alarm is generated when a


circuit pack is inserted into an unprovisioned slot within a quadrant that
has already been provisioned for another type of circuit pack.
Note 1: When inserting circuit packs, wait at least 20 seconds after
inserting each circuit pack to allow the system to auto-provision it before
inserting the next. In some cases, a momentary “Circuit pack fail” alarm
may appear if several circuit packs are inserted at the same time. Refer to
Module Replacement Procedures, 323-1211-547 for replacement
procedures.
Note 2: When an external synchronization interface (ESI) circuit pack has
been inserted, it requires a warm-up period of one hour. During this time
the user should not initiate any protection switches to the newly inserted
circuit pack.
Note 3: When the shelf is to be equipped with synchronous tributary circuit
packs, ESI circuit packs should be provisioned and supplying the shelf
clock before the tributary circuit packs are inserted.
Note 4: An unprotected STM-1o circuit pack must be inserted in the GA
slot position.
Equipment and facility defaults
This section lists the default parameter values for the various equipment and
facilities on STM-16 terminal and regenerator/optical amplifier shelves. By
default, the state of a terminal or regenerator network element is IS (in
service) and the autoprovisioning feature is enabled.

Equipment defaults
For STM-16 shelves and their circuit packs, the location is user-definable
(defaults to blanks).

The GMT offset (in minutes) for the shelf defaults to 0. Refer to
Commissioning and Site Testing Procedures, 323-1211-220, to set this value.

The default signal-degrade threshold for STM-16 transport interfaces, 140M,


34M, STM-1e,VC4, STM-1o and STM-4o tributaries is 10-6.

Circuit packs are placed in the in-service (IS) state when they are inserted into
the shelf. The default status is Active for a working circuit pack and standby
for a protection unit .

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Provisioning defaults 1-5

ESI and shelf timing


When a new system equipped with ESI is powered up, the defaults settings for
1
the ESI and shelf timing are as follows:
• Shelf clock source: Freerun
• BITSA facility: in service
• BITSB facility: in service
• Primary input timing reference source: BITSA
• Secondary input timing reference source: BITSB
• ESI target filter mode: Freerun
• G1Out facility: in service
• G2Out facility: in service
• ESI timing distribution source (see Note): STMA for G1Out and STMB
for G2Out

Note: Although the timing reference outputs G1Out and G2Out are
provisioned by default to synchronize to STMA and STMB, respectively,
using these settings on a linear system causes an “ESI Tx AIS” alarm to be
raised on the inactive optical channel. For example, if G1 is active, the
“ESI Tx G2 AIS” alarm will be raised. This condition only occurs on linear
systems, not on rings. There are three ways to prevent this alarm from
being raised:

— G1Out and G2Out can be placed out of service (if they are not used).
— The alarm can be disabled from the G1Out and G2Out facility alarm
provisioning screens (see Procedure 3-15, “Provisioning the facility
alarms” in Chapter 3 of this document).
— G1Out and G2Out can both be provisioned to synchronize to the active
optics (refer to Commissioning Procedures, 323-1201-220).

ESI timing reference input and output


The following defaults are assigned to parameters for the ESI timing reference
input and timing reference output:
• Coding format: B8ZS (1.5MBit/s ESI circuit pack only)
• Framing format: Superframe (1.5MBit/s ESI circuit pack only)
• Signal format: DS1 (1.5MBit/s ESI circuit pack only)
• Source: STMA (timing reference output)
• Timing reference: STM16 G1 (timing reference output)
Optical amplifier and high performance transmitter defaults
The default output power for a high performance transmitter is +10 dBm.

For an optical amplifier on a terminal shelf, the default parameters are as


follows:
• Configuration: Post

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1-6 Provisioning defaults

• Output power: +10 dBm


For an optical amplifier on a regenerator/optical amplifier shelf, the default
parameters are as follows:
• Configuration: Line
• Output power: +8 dBm
Two thresholds are available on the optical amplifier. The loss of signal (LOS)
threshold is the input power level at which a “Loss of signal” alarm is raised.
The shutoff threshold is the input power level at which the laser is turned off.

Note: In an optical amplifier, the LOS alarm and the shutoff action are
guaranteed only if the optical reflection specification of -24 dB at the input
connector is met. A disconnected or dirty input connector may inhibit these
actions.

The default values for these thresholds on a line amplifier are as follows:
• LOS threshold: -21 dBm
• Shutoff threshold: -27 dBm
The default threshold values on a post amplifier are as follows:
• LOS threshold: -3 dBm
• Shutoff threshold: -9 dBm
Facility defaults
All facilities are placed in the IS state when the circuit pack on which they are
carried is provisioned.

For all facilities on terminal or regenerator/optical amplifier shelves the


facility ID is user-definable.

The default line signal-degrade threshold for STM-1o, STM-4o and STM-16
facilities on terminal or add-drop multiplexer (ADM) shelves is 10-6.

Defaults for STM-1e and 140M facilities on STM-16 terminal shelves are as
follows:
• Signal-degrade threshold: 10-6
• Line build-out: Short (refer to Commissioning Procedures, 323-1211-220
for the procedure to set this parameter)
• Loopback: None

STM connection defaults


In a new system (linear or ring), there are no default mappings for STM
connections. All STM connections must be manually provisioned.

For instructions on adding STM connections refer to Chapter 5, “Setting up


connections at the OPC” in this document.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Provisioning defaults 1-7

Protection-switching defaults 1
The following sections give the default values assigned to
protection-switching parameters. To change these values, refer to
Commissioning and Site Testing Procedures, 323-1211-220.

Protection-switching priority
On a 1:N system, priorities can be assigned to the working channels. The
default priority is high for working channel 1 and low for all other working
channels.

Route diversity setting


An SP Ring is a route diverse system by default. The route diversity
parameter cannot be changed on a ring system.

A 1:N system must be non-route diverse. Route diversity cannot be enabled


on a 1:N system.

STM-1o and STM-4o tributaries are always non-route diverse and do not
have a route diversity parameter associated with them.

Protection-switching mode
On an SPRing, the protection-switching mode is bidirectional and cannot be
changed.

On 1:N systems, the default protection-switching mode for STM-16 channels


is bidirectional.

The default protection-switching mode for STM-1o and STM-4o tributaries is


bidirectional.

Protection scheme
For STM-1o and STM-4o interfaces, the protection scheme is always 1+1
non-revertive and they do not have a protection-scheme parameter associated
with them at the STM-16 network element.

Provisioning of user interface ports


User access to the TN-16X Network Element is available via four RS-232
ports: user interface (UI) Port 1, located on the right side subrack wing, UI
Port 2, located on the Local Craft Access Panel, and UI Ports 3 and 4
(configurable as UI), located on the left side subrack wing.

The default values for configuring a user interface port are as follows:
• Port state: IS (in service)
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: None
• Character size: 8
• Stop bits: 1

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1-8 Provisioning defaults

Parallel telemetry
A FiberWorld network allows external alarms to be carried to an alarm centre
by means of external customer inputs. A set of output relays are also provided
in order to activate bells, lamps, or generators.

A set of 16 external inputs is provided for inputs on a 25-pin connector on the


right side subrack wing. The inputs are activated by applying a ground. These
inputs correspond to external alarms only (for example, power failure, fire
alarm, or flood alarm); that is, they are not system alarms (for example, signal
degrade, protection failure, or circuit-pack failure). Each of these external
customer inputs can be assigned a 40-character string of text to identify it.
The alarm category and severity are preset to minor and non-service affecting,
and can be changed via the user interface.

The default parameter values for an external input are as follows:


• Status: On
• Condition: Inactive
• Alarm severity: Minor
• Service impact: nsa (non-service affecting)

A 25-pin connector on the left side subrack wing provides the connection for
eight Form-C relays for parallel telemetry output. Alternatively, the user can
also manually operate and release the relay. These relay outputs are typically
used to activate bells or lamps or to start generators, heaters, or air
conditioners. The default assignment for relay outputs for the TN-16X Ring
ADM node is shown in Table 1-3. The default assignment for relay outputs
for the regenerator/optical amplifier shelf is shown in Table 1-4.
Table 1-3
Mapping positions for the telemetry output port (points 1 to 8) on the TN-16X terminal

Point Status Condition Display ID Shelf Display Display Description


Byte Bit

1 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 1 7 STM-16 Signal Fail

2 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 1 8 STM-16 Signal Degrade

3 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 1 1 STM-16 Equipment Fail

4 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 7 1 STM-16 Protection Switch


Complete

5 On Active Monitor 2 1 2 1 Tributary Metallic Fail

6 On Active Monitor 2 1 1 2 Tributary Equipment Fail

7 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 3 4 STM4Protection Switch Complete

8 On Active Monitor 2 1 2 6 Common Equipment Fail

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Provisioning defaults 1-9

Table 1-4
Mapping positions for the telemetry output port (points 1 to 8) on the TN-16X
1
regenerator/optical amplifier shelf
Point Status Condition Display ID Subrack Byte Bit Description

1 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 2 8 STM-16 Facility East Fault Active

2 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 2 7 STM-16 Facilty West Fault Active

3 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 3 2 STM-16 Equipment East Fault Active

4 On Inactive Monitor 2 1 3 1 STM-16 Equipment West Fault


Active

5 On Active Monitor 2 1 2 6 Common Equipment Fail

6 On Inactive - - -

7 On Inactive - - -

8 On Inactive - - -

STM-16 optical power (OP) and laser bias current (LBC)


The OP and LBC are provided for customer use in the following normalized
format:

OP% = Current OP x 100 LBC% = Current LBC x 100

OP normalizing factor LBC normalizing factor

The OP and LBC provide an early indication of laser degradation, and are
used by customers to keep a record of laser performance. The default start-up
value for both the OP and the LBC is 100. The default
performance-monitoring threshold values are 50 for the OP and 150 for the
LBC. Both thresholds are disabled by default and the default report type for
both is PAlrt (performance alert).

To set the normalizing factor for the OP and the LBC, refer to the appropriate
procedure in Commissioning Procedures, 323-1211-220.

Note: STM-1o and STM-4o interface circuit packs have their


normalization factors programmed in the factory, however default settings
may be changed in the field.

Performance thresholds
Performance thresholds are user-defined values assigned to particular
performance error statistics. These are used to generate alerts when these
values are reached or exceeded. Thresholds are used to alert maintenance
personnel that the number of performance errors is beyond an acceptable
number for a particular parameter.

Thresholds are available for each error statistic in each direction (if
applicable) for each facility (two thresholds for STM-16 and STM-4o). These

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


1-10 Provisioning defaults

thresholds must be defined for a particular interval and fall within the range of
values allowed for that interval (see Performance Monitoring Description,
323-1211-105).

Facility performance-monitoring thresholds


The default report type for all facility performance-monitoring thresholds is
PAlrt (performance alert). All thresholds are disabled (status set to Off) by
default.

Performance-monitoring counts are provided over the following intervals:


• current and last timed (15-minute) interval
• current and last day
• current untimed interval
• last 32 timed (15-minute) intervals
• last 7 days
The default interval for performance-monitoring counts is a timed interval,
except for Threshold 2 counts for STM-4o and STM16 facilities, for which
the default interval is a day.

The default threshold values for each facility are shown in Table 1-5.

Table 1-5
Facility performance monitoring threshold values

RsCV (regenerator section coding 1172 4430


violation)

RsES (regenerator section error second) 346 864

RsSES (regenerator section severely 2 4


errored second)

RsSEFS (regenerator section severely 7 17


errored frame second)

MsCV (multiplex section coding violation) 1772 4430

MsES (multiplex section error second) 346 864

MsSES (multiplex section severely 2 4


errored second)

end of chapter

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


2-1
2
Equipment procedures 2-
This chapter explains the provisioning procedures relevant to the equipment
(that is, the circuit packs) on TN-16X terminal shelves, Ring ADM nodes and
Regenerator/optical amplifier shelves.

The TN-16X shelf is used to house equipment for STM-16 MS SPRings with
34M, STM-1 or VC4e tributaries (no protection), STM-1o or STM-4o
tributaries (1+1 protection), and terminals in linear systems (1:N protection).

These procedures are used to test circuit packs, assign traffic to them, and
bring the shelf into working condition for testing or monitoring purposes. The
procedures are performed, as appropriate, on individual circuit packs, circuit
pack types, or on the shelf equipment as a whole.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-2 Equipment procedures

Chapter task list

Task Page

Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status page 2-3

Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment page 2-6

Activating or deactivating a circuit pack page 2-12

Adding a circuit pack to the system page 2-16

Deleting a circuit pack from the system page 2-19

Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups) page 2-22

Provisioning equipment alarms page 2-25

Performing a shelf inventory page 2-41

Listing the circuit packs on a shelf page 2-43

Performing a shelf lamp test page 2-45

Changing the shelf position number page 2-46

Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or page 2-47
high performance transmitter

Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier page 2-49

Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier page 2-51

Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a page 2-53


high performance transmitter

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-3

Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status


This procedure displays the status of the circuit packs on a TN-16X terminal,
Ring ADM node or regenerator/optical amplifier. The status is shown for a
specified type of circuit pack or for the shelf as a whole.

The types of circuit pack that can be queried for a TN-16X terminal, or Ring
2
ADM node include the 34M, STM-1e and VC4e circuit pack groups, STM-1o
or STM-4o tributary circuit packs, STM-16 optical circuit pack groups,
Orderwire (OW) - on linear systems only, External Synchronization Interface
(ESI), Shelf Processor (SP), Maintenance Interface (MI), Operations
Controller (OPC), or Shelf (Sh) equipment, Optical amplifier (OpAmp), and
High Performance Transmitter (HPTx).

The types of circuit pack that can be queried for a TN-16X regenerator/optical
amplifier shelf include the TN-16X circuit pack groups, orderwire (OW),
Shelf Processor (SP), Maintenance Interface (MI), Operations Controller
(OPC), or Shelf (Sh) equipment, Optical amplifier (OpAmp), and High
Performance Transmitter (HPTx).

Requirements
To perform this procedure you must:
• be logged on to the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 2-1
Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-4 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-1
Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment type> is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16,
ow, sp, mi, opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for
terminal or ADM shelves.
<circuit pack group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for
STM1o equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e
equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high
performance transmitter equipment on a
terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment type> is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
regenerators
<circuit pack group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high
performance transmitter equipment on a
regenerator

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status. The following Equipment screen displays are
shown for example purposes.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-5

Procedure 2-1
Displaying the equipment (circuit pack or shelf) status (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one shows the status of an STM-16 circuit pack group 2
on an TN-16X terminal shelf or Ring ADM node (in an MS SPRing).
FW00608B

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Equip
0 Quit STM16 Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query Location: < > ShPos 1
4
State: IS-Traffic-Rx Active-Tx Active
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Status: Active
7 ALS Status: Enabled
8 ChgState Circuit Packs: STM16 Rx NT8E02DB Slot 6
9 Demux NT8E06AA Slot 7
10 DtlProt STM16 Tx NT8E01BA Slot 8
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16 Facility
17 AlmProv
18 Help

NE 1
Time 17:35

A screen similar to this one shows an STM-16 regenerator shelf.


FW00609A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Equip
0 Quit STM-16 Regenerator Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G2 Westbound
3 Query Location: ShPos 1
4 State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt ALS Status: Enabled
7 Circuit Packs: STM16 Rx NT8E02AA Slot 11
8 ChgState STM16 TRg NTFW03DB Slot 12
9
10
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16 Facility
17 AlmProv
18 Help

NE 1
Time 23:59

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-6 Equipment procedures

Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment


This procedure allows the mode of the VC4e equipment to be changed to
either STM1e or 140M. The VC4e equipment will autoprovision to STM1e
mode and will be allocated an SDCC comms port.

If the mode of the equipment is changed to 140M, the SDCC port is no longer
required and must be manually de-provisioned.

Note: To manually de-provision the SDCC port, you must be directly


logged into the NE.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

CAUTION
Risk of loss of data
This procedure will cause loss of traffic.

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment

Step Action

1 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment type> is vc4e
<circuit pack group> is g1 to g16, for VC4e equipment

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-7

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment (continued)

Step Action

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed, 2


showing the equipment status.
FW00614B

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
8 Belfast . . . . . . . .
VC4e Equip
0 Quit VC4e Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G9
3 Query Location: ShPos 1
4 State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt
Mode: STM1e
7
Circuit Packs: VC4e NTFW08CA Slot 12
8 ChgState Carrier NTFW17AA Slot 32
9 I/O Port NTFW14AA Slot 32-1
10
11
12 ChgMode
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16 Facility
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 8
Time 17:35

2 Access the Facility screen for the type of facility desired and display the facility
status by entering:
facility ↵
The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status.
FW00615A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . .
6 . . . . .
8 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G9
3 Query
4 Add State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: On
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
12 Loopback: None Framing: Off
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 8
Time 17:35

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-8 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment (continued)

Step Action

3 Deactivate the facility by entering:


chgstate <oos> ↵
If you change from in-service to out-of-service, the system warns that traffic
will be lost and prompts for confirmation (yes or no). To confirm the change to
out-of-service, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the change to out-of-service, enter:
no ↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM1e or 140M facility is
deactivated.
FW00616B

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . 6
. . . . . .
8 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G9
3 Query
4 Add State: OOS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: On
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: OOS
10
11 Edit Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
12 Loopback: None Framing: Off
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment ChgState OOS
16 ChgState command successful
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 8
Time 17:35

4 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt ↵
The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,
showing the equipment status.
5 Change the mode of the VC4e equipment by entering:
chgmode <mode> ↵
where:
<mode>is 140M or STM1e
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-9

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment (continued)

Step Action

A screen similiar to this is displayed when the mode of the VC4e equipment 2
is changed.
FW00617B

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
8 Belfast . . . . . . . .
VC4e Equip
0 Quit VC4e Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G9
3 Query Location: ShPos 1
4 State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt
7 Mode: 140M
Circuit Packs: VC4e NTFW08CA Slot 12
8 ChgState Carrier NTFW17AA Slot 32
9 I/O Port NTFW14AA Slot 32-1
10
11
12 ChgMode
13 Add
14 Delete
15 ChgMode 140M
16 Facility ChgMode command successful.
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 8
Time 17:35

6 The facility activates automatically once the mode change is successful.


7 If the mode was changed to STM1e, this is the end of the procedure. If the
mode was changed to 140M, go to step 8 to manually de-provision the SDCC
port.
Note: To carry out to procedures of steps 8 to 13, you must be directly logged
into the NE.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-10 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment (continued)

Step Action

8 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
FW00651A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac
0 Quit COMM Facility Shelf: 1
2
3 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
4 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
5 ListAlms NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
6 AlmRpt
7 AreaAddr
8 Ports
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

9 Access the port prov screen by entering:


ports ↵
portprov ↵
The COMM Facility PortProv screen is displayed.
FW00684A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Port Prov
0 Quit COMM Facility PortProv Shelf: 1
2 Type Number Prov Status Alarm Connected To
3 CNET IS UP - LAN
4 SDCC 1 IS UP - G1 slots 7/8
5 ListAlms SDCC 2 IS UP - G2 slots 9/10
6 AlmRpt
SDCC 3 OOS DOWN - G1/G2 slots 7/10
7 AreaAddr
8 ChgState SDCC 4 OOS DOWN - G7/8 slots 36/38
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15 DtlPort PORTPROV:
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

Note: For a ring system, the COMM Facility PortProv screen will list 1 to 40
SDCC channels.
10 From the COMM facility PortProv screen, note the number of the SDCC port
to which the VC4e circuit pack is connected (or is to be connected).
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-11

Procedure 2-2
Changing the mode of the VC4e equipment (continued)

Step Action

11 Select the COMM Fac SDCC details screen by entering the following 2
commands:
dtlport <port type> < SDCC numbers> ↵
where
<port type> is sdcc
<SDCC number> as noted in step 10

The COMM Fac SDCC Details screen is displayed.


FW00685A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
SDCC Port
0 Quit COMM Fac SDCC Details Shelf: 1
2 Channel: SDCC 1
3 Provisioned : IS
4 Status : UP
5 ListAlms Connected To : G1 slots 7/8
6 AlmRpt Adjacent To : NE 16 NE16
Cost of the Link : 6
7 AreaAddr Alarm Text : -
8 ChgState Maximum Frame Size: < 1304>
9 LstNodes LAPD Number : 0
10 Routes
11 Edit
12 CommsPM
13
14 Stats
15 DtlPort
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

12 Activate or deactivate the facility by entering:


chgstate < state> ↵
where
<state > is oos or is

If you change state from in-service to out-of-service, the system prompts for
confirmation (yes or no). To confirm the change to out-of-service, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the change to out-of-service, enter:
no ↵
13 Return to the COMM Facility screen by entering:
quit ↵
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-12 Equipment procedures

Activating or deactivating a circuit pack


This procedure places the selected circuit pack in service or out of service.
The chgstate command does not apply to the Shelf Processor (SP) circuit
pack or to the shelf (Sh).

Placing the Maintenance Interface out of service (OOS) disables the


nonvolatile storage, performance-monitoring clock and telemetry capabilities.

In the in-service (IS) state, all the alarms for the equipment are reported. The
impact of an alarm can be either service affecting or non-service affecting.
The impact often depends on whether protection is available. For example, an
equipment alarm can be service affecting if the equipment is not protected or
non-service affecting if the equipment is protected. Refer to Tables 2-1
through 2-10, which follow Procedure 2-7, “Provisioning equipment alarms”
in this chapter. Protection switching is operable in this state, and
performance-monitoring statistics are accessible.

In the out-of-service (OOS) state, no alarms are reported for the circuit pack
and protection switching is inhibited. A confirmation is required to deactivate
a circuit pack.
The following restrictions apply to changing the state of traffic-carrying circuit
packs:
• A circuit pack cannot be deactivated without first deactivating all the
facilities it is carrying (see Procedure 3-2, “Activating or deactivating a
facility” in Chapter 3 of this document).
• Before removing a circuit pack from the shelf, it is important to take the
circuit pack out of service. Failure to do so may result in a traffic hit.
• A circuit pack cannot be taken out of service when it is carrying active
traffic. Traffic must first be switched to the other circuit pack in the circuit
pack group.
Requirements
To perform this procedure you must:
• be logged on to the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

CAUTION
Risk of loss of traffic
This procedure may cause loss of traffic

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-13

Procedure 2-3
Activating or deactivating a circuit pack

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16, ow,
type> sp, mi, opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for terminal
or ADM shelves.
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o
equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
type> regenerators
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-14 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-3
Activating or deactivating a circuit pack (continued)

Step Action

4 Activate or deactivate the equipment by entering:


chgstate <state> ↵
where
<state> is is (in-service) or oos (out-of-service)

If you change state from in-service to out-of-service, the system prompts for
confirmation (yes or no). To confirm the change to out-of-service, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the change to out-of-service, enter:
no ↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a circuit pack on a TN-16X
terminal or Ring ADM node is deactivated (anSTM-16 circuit pack is shown
in this example).
FW00618A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Equip
0 Quit STM16 Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
4 State: OOS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Status: Active
ALS Status: Enabled
7
Circuit Packs: STM16 Rx NT8E02DB Slot 6
8 ChgState Demux NT8E06AA Slot 7
9 STM16 Tx NT8E01BA Slot 8
10 Dt1Prot
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16 Facility
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-15

Procedure 2-3
Activating or deactivating a circuit pack (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a circuit pack on an STM16 2


terminal shelf is activated (a VC4e circuit pack is shown in this example).
FW00620A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
VC4e Equip
0 Quit VC4e Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G1
3 Query Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
4 State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Mode: 140M
7 Circuit Packs: VC4e NT7E19AA Slot 2
8 ChgState VC4e Carr NT7E19AA Slot 25
9 VC4e I/O NT7E19AA Slot 25
10
11 ChgMode QUERY ALL NE ID: 2 BELFAST
12 Shelf: 1
13 Add
14 Delete Unit State Mode
15 G1 IS 140M
16 Facility G2
G3 IS STM1e
17 AlmProv G4 IS 140M
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-16 Equipment procedures

Adding a circuit pack to the system


This procedure is used to inform the system software that a new circuit pack
or circuit pack group is being added to the system after it has been manually
deleted. Since the shelf’s auto-provisioning feature automatically adds a
circuit pack and places it in service when it is physically installed, this
procedure is required only when a circuit pack or circuit pack group which
was manually deleted is to be added back.

The add command does not apply to the Shelf Processor (SP), the
Maintenance Interface (MI), or the Shelf (Sh).

When this procedure is completed, the circuit pack is in the in-service state.
The newly added circuit pack becomes the currently selected circuit pack.

If a circuit pack is deleted and then added back, it reverts to its default state.
For 1:N systems, if STM-16 circuit pack group G1 of channel N (where N >
1) is deleted and then added back, it reverts to the default state (that is, as
channel 1). This causes a “Channel ID mismatch” alarm to be raised and any
active switch on that channel to fail. For more information on alarms, refer to
Alarm and Trouble Clearing Procedures, 323-1211-543. To add the channel
back, refer to the procedures describing 1:N provisioning in Commissioning
Procedures, 323-1211-220.

When inserting circuit packs, wait at least 20 seconds after inserting each
circuit pack to allow the system to autoprovision it before inserting the next.
In some cases, a momentary ‘Circuit pack fail’ alarm may appear if several
circuit packs are inserted at the same time. Refer to Module Replacement
Procedures, 323-1211-547.

When adding an ESI to the shelf, it is important to ensure that the sub-units
are firmly seated within the ESI Carrier; otherwise, problems with external
synchronization may occur.

Note: The ESI circuit pack needs to warmed up for an hour before being
used. The use of a non-warmed up circuit pack may cause the STM-16
signal to fail jitter or wander mask specifications.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-17

Procedure 2-4
Adding a circuit pack to the system

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16, ow,
type> sp, mi, opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for terminal
or ADM shelves.
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o
equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
type> regenerators
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-18 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-4
Adding a circuit pack to the system (continued)

Step Action

4 Add equipment to the system by entering:


add ↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a circuit pack is added (an
Orderwire (OW) circuit pack is shown in this example)
FW00621A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
OW Equip
0 Quit Orderwire Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
3 Query
4 State: IS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt
7 Circuit Pack: Ordrwire NT7E25AA Slot 17
8 ChgState
9
10
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-19

Deleting a circuit pack from the system


This procedure informs the system software that a circuit pack is being
removed from the system.

A circuit pack cannot be deleted without first deleting all the facilities it is
carrying (see Procedure 3-7, ‘Deleting a facility from a network element’ in
2
Chapter 3 of this document), and then placing the circuit pack out of service
(OOS).

In a STM-16 MS SPRing, the last STM-16 optics circuit pack group cannot
be deleted if a node map or STM connections still exist. For example, if G1
has been deleted, G2 cannot be deleted until the node has been removed from
the node map and the STM connections on that node have all been deleted.
Refer to System Expansion Procedures, 323-1211-224, for instructions on
how to delete add-drop multiplexer (ADM) nodes, using the Configuration
Manager tool of the operations controller (OPC). Refer to Chapter 5, “Setting
up STM-1 connections at the OPC,” in this document for instructions on how
to delete STM connections, using the Connection Manager tool.

The delete command does not apply to the Shelf Processor (SP), the
Maintenance Interface (MI), or the Shelf (Sh).

When a circuit pack is deleted, the state of the circuit pack becomes Null, and
the corresponding work area for that circuit pack is not updated immediately.
It can be accessed again from another screen, but no information is available
until the circuit pack is added back to the system and selected again.

If equipment is deleted and then added back, it reverts to its default state. For
multishelf 1:N systems, if STM-16 circuit pack group (CPG) G1 of channel N
(where N > 1) is deleted and then added back, it reverts to the default state
(that is, as channel 1). This causes a “Channel ID mismatch” alarm to be
raised and any active switch on that channel fails (refer to Alarm and Trouble
Clearing Procedures, 323-1211-543). To add the channel back, refer to
Commissioning Procedures, 323-1211-220.

It should be noted that the OPC continues to run regardless of its state at a
local NE User Interface. If the OPC is to be removed, it must first be shut
down using the OPC Shutdown tool. Refer to Common Procedures,
323-1211-846.

Requirements
To perform this procedure you must:
• be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-20 Equipment procedures

CAUTION
Risk of loss of traffic
This procedure may cause loss of traffic

Procedure 2-5
Deleting a circuit pack from the system

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16, ow, sp, mi,
type> opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for terminal or ADM
shelves.
<circuit is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
pack group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment

is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o


equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment type> is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
regenerators
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-21

Procedure 2-5
Deleting a circuit pack from the system (continued)

Step Action

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed, 2


showing the equipment status.
4 If the circuit pack is not already set to the out-of-service state, deactivate it by
entering:
chgstate oos ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
5 Delete the circuit pack by entering:
delete ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
6 To confirm the deletion, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the deletion, enter:
no ↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a circuit pack on a TN-16X Ring
ADM node is deleted (an STM-1e circuit pack is shown in this example).
FW00622A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . * . . *
1 Belfast . . . . * . . .
STM1 Equip ------------------------***Object Deleted***---------------------------
0 Quit STM1e Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
4 State: Null
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Circuit Packs: STM1e NTFW08AA Slot 2
7 Carrier NTFW17AA Slot 25
8 ChgState I/O Port NTFW14AA Slot 25-1
9
10 Dt1Prot
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Yes
16 Facility Delete command successful.
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-22 Equipment procedures

Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups)


This procedure displays the service state protection-switching priority, and
protection-switch status for the selected circuit pack or circuit pack group. If
another shelf is queried, the physical and identification parameters of that
shelf are displayed.

The Query command is executed from the screen for the current circuit pack
when you want to query the status of another circuit pack or circuit pack
group. The output is displayed in the output scroll area, and therefore does not
overwrite the original screen for the current circuit pack. When ‘More...’ is
displayed on the screen, more information can be displayed by pressing
Return (↵).

The Query command only operates on the type of equipment selected on the
Equipment screen in step 2 or 3.

Note: Power information for an optical amplifier or a high performance


transmitter (HPTx) can also be displayed through the CI (command
interpreter) tool, opampci. See Procedure 2-15, “Displaying detailed
power information for an optical amplifier or a high performance
transmitter”.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-6
Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups)

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-23

Procedure 2-6
Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups) (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display 2
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16, ow,
type> sp, mi, opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for terminal
or ADM shelves.
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o
equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
type> regenerators
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-24 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-6
Querying equipment (circuit packs and circuit pack groups) (continued)

Step Action

4 Query another circuit pack group and display its status by entering:
query <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 or all (default) for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o
equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM1e or VC4e equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

Note: Entering query ↵ witout any parameters will query all equipment of the
type shown on the screen.
A screen similar to the following is displayed when an equipment query is
performed on a TN-16X terminal (an STM-1e equipment query is shown in
this example).
FW00624A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Equip
0 Quit STM1e Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
4 State: OOS
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Circuit Packs: STM1e NTFW08AA Slot 2
7 Carrier NTFW17AA Slot 25
8 ChgState I/O Port NTFW14AA Slot 25-1
9
10
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Query G6
16 Facility STM1e Equipment NE ID: 1 Belfast
17 AlmProv Shelf: 1
18 Help Unit: STM1e G6
State: IS-Traffic Location: 1234.56 ShPos 1
NE 1
Time 17:35 More...

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-25

Provisioning equipment alarms


Use this procedure to display the provisioning status for the alarm points of a
TN-16X terminal, Ring ADM node or TN-16X regenerator shelf. The alarms
for each shelf relate to the circuit packs, power supply, and environmental
conditions. For the TN-16X terminal or Ring ADM node, the alarms are
divided into categories of 34M, STM-1e, VC4e, STM-1o, STM-4o, STM-16,
2
External Synchronization Interface (ESI), optical amplifier, high performance
transmitter (HPTx), and common equipment (which includes the power
supply and environmental alarms).

The procedure is also used to enable and disable any of the alarms.
Confirmation is requested when you are disabling an alarm . Alarm conditions
are not reported for disabled alarms.

Note: Performance alerts can be provisioned to be raised as alarms. For


instructions, refer to Performance Monitoring Procedures, 323-1211-520.

Table 2-1 to Table 2-10 at the end of this procedure list the equipment alarms
by category and in the order of their provisioning numbers. Refer to Alarm
and Trouble Clearing Procedures, 323-1211-543, for descriptions of each
alarm and the associated troubleshooting procedures.

Alarms that are not provisionable or that are not applicable to the current
software load are marked by a dash (-) in the Status column. If you use the
“all” option when accessing the alarm provisioning screens, all the alarms are
shown with a dash in the Status column. Enabling or disabling an alarm then
causes the dash to change to On or Off, as appropriate. Also, all instances of
the alarm (for example, alarms that have G1 and G2 instances) are shown
with the changed status.

The NE user interface displays the active alarms. In addition, up to 50 of the


most recent alarms (active and cleared) are stored as the NE’s alarm history. If
an alarm is disabled (deprovisioned), it does not appear in the alarm history
list, but any historical instances reappear if the alarm is re-enabled.

The active alarms for an operations controller (OPC) span of control can be
displayed using the Alarm Monitor tool. A complete history of alarms, logs,
and alerts for an OPC span of control can be displayed using the Event
Browser tool. Refer to Network Surveillance Procedures, 323-1211-510.

Requirements
To perform this procedure you must:
• be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-26 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-7
Provisioning equipment alarms

Step Action

1 If you are accessing equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step


2. If you are accessing equipment on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is 34m, stm1e, vc4e, stm1o, stm4, stm16, ow,
type> sp, mi, opc, esi, sh, opamp, or hptx for terminal
or ADM shelves.
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o equipment
is g1a or g1b to g16a or g16b, or all for STM1o
equipment
is g1 to g16, or all for STM-1e or VC4e equipment
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M equipment
is g1 or g2 for ESI equipment
is g1 or g2 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a terminal or ADM shelf

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the Equipment screen for the type of equipment desired and display
the equipment status by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<equipment is stm16, ow, sp, mi, opamp or hptx for
type> regenerators
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 equipment
group> is g1 to g8 for optical amplifier or high performance
transmitter equipment on a regenerator
<east/west> is e or w for regenerator.

The Equipment screen for the type of equipment specified is displayed,


showing the equipment status.
4 Display the equipment alarm points by entering:
almprov ↵
The equipment Alarm Provisioning screen is displayed.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-27

Procedure 2-7
Provisioning equipment alarms (continued)

Step Action

5 Enable or disable an alarm point by entering: 2


editstat <alarm point number> <status> ↵
where
<alarm point is the number corresponding to the alarm in the
number> alarm provisioning screen
<status> is on or off, or press Return (↵) to toggle between
on and off

Note: The alarm ‘Intercard clock: TxG1 to DmxG1’ cannot be enabled from
the equipmnt stm16 g2 almprov screen, and the alarm ‘Intercard clock
TxG2 to DmxG2’ cannot be enabled from the equipmnt stm16 g1 almprov
screen.
For off, confirmation is requested.
6
If you want to Then enter
confirm the command and disable the alarm point yes ↵
cancel the disabling of the alarm point no ↵

Note: If more than ten alarm points exist, only the alarm points currently
displayed on the screen can be provisioned. Use F (forward) and B
(backward) to page through the alarm points.
The screen is updated with the new alarm point status in reverse video.
A screen similar to this one is displayed when the equipment alarms are
provisioned ( the STM-1 equipment alarm screen is shown in this example).
FW00627A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . * . .
1 Belfast . . . . . * . .
AlmProv
0 Quit STM1e Equipment Alarm Provisioning Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3
4 # Alarm Point Status
5 ListAlms 1 Circuit pack missing On
6 AlmRpt 2 Circuit pack mismatch On
3 Circuit pack fail On
7 4 Parity error to G1 optics On
8 5 Parity error to G2 optics On
9 6 Parity error from G1 optics On
10 7 Parity error from G2 optics On
11 EditStat 8 Drop I/O equip fail/missing On
12 9 Firmware/software incompatible On
13
14
15
16 EditStat 1 On
17 EditStat command successful.
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-28 Equipment procedures

Common equipment and local environmental alarms


Table 2-1 summarizes the alarms related to the common equipment (that is,
equipment used for the control and monitoring of the network element
shelves). This includes the Shelf Processor, Maintenance Interface, and
Orderwire circuit packs and the Operations Controller module. Some
common equipment alarms include communications alarms.

Also included in this table are local environmental alarms, such as high shelf
temperature and battery supply fail, and certain alarms related to shelf
synchronisation, upgrades, and other system functions.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-29

These alarms can be reviewed in the Shelf Alarm Provisioning screen.


Table 2-1
Common equipment alarms

Alarm
Point
Alarm point Severity Service
code
Default
status
2
Number

1 MI circuit pack missing Major nsa Enabled


2 MI circuit pack mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
3 MI circuit pack fail Minor nsa Enabled
4 MI non-volatile store failure Minor nsa Enabled
5 MI non-volatile store mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
6 SP firmware update fail Minor nsa Enabled
7 SP MBus access fail Minor nsa Enabled
8 Autoprovisioning mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
9 High shelf temperature Minor nsa Enabled
10 48 V battery A CE supply fail Minor nsa Enabled
11 48 V battery B CE supply fail Minor nsa Enabled
12 OPC circuit pack missing Minor nsa Enabled
13 OPC circuit pack mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
14 OPC circuit pack fail Minor nsa Enabled
15 OPC CNet loss of signal Minor nsa Enabled
16 OPC Ethernet loss of signal Minor nsa Enabled
17 OPC hardware reset Minor nsa Enabled
18 OW circuit pack missing Minor nsa Enabled
19 OW circuit pack mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
20 OW circuit pack fail Minor nsa Enabled
21 OW invalid DIP switch setting Minor nsa Enabled
22 Inconsistent network data. Type Q Minor nsa Enabled
NAPPROVE (linear and rings)
23 Exerciser fail Minor nsa Enabled
24 Software Trap Minor nsa Enabled
25 Low shelf voltage Major nsa Enabled
26 Fan 1 fail Minor nsa Enabled
27 Fan 2 fail Minor nsa Enabled
28 Fan 3 fail Minor nsa Enabled
29 Fan 4 fail* Minor nsa Enabled
30 ADM in single-node configuration Minor nsa Enabled
(rings only)*
31 Entry to synchronous clock freerun Warning nsa Enabled
32 Timing generation primary reference fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Major (unprotected) SA Enabled
33 Timing generation secondary reference fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Major (unprotected) SA Enabled
34 ESI upgrade/downgrade in progress Minor nsa Enabled

* not available on a regenerator

Note: SA: service affecting; nsa: non-service affecting

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-30 Equipment procedures

External (environmental) alarms


Table 2-2 summarizes the alarms related to remote telemetry. The remote
telemetry features are described in detail in Alarms and Surveillance
Description, 323-1211-104.
Table 2-2
External (environmental) alarms

Alarm Point Alarm label Severity Service Default


number level code status

1-16 Telemetry Input 1-16 Minor nsa Enabled

Note: These alarms (including the label, severity level, and service code)
can be defined by the user.

34M equipment alarms


Table 2-3 summarizes the alarms related to the 34M tributary equipment.
Table 2-3
34M equipment alarms

Alarm Point Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

2 Circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

3 Circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

4 Parity error to G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

5 Parity error to G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

6 Parity error from G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

7 Parity error from G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

8 Firmware/software incompatible Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

9 Drop I/O equip fail/missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-31

STM-1e equipment alarms


Table 2-4 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-1e tributary equipment
Table 2-4
STM1e equipment alarms

Alarm Point Alarm label Severity level Service Default


2
number code status

1 Circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

2 Circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

3 Circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

4 Parity error to G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

5 Parity error to G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

6 Parity error from G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

7 Parity error from G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

8 Drop I/O equip fail/missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

9 Firmware/software incompatible Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

VC4e equipment alarms


Table 2-5 summarizes the alarms related to VC4e tributary equipment.
Table 2-5
VC4e equipment alarms

Alarm Point Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

2 Circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

3 Circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

4 Parity error to G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-32 Equipment procedures

Table 2-5
VC4e equipment alarms (continued)

Alarm Point Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status
5 Parity error to G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Major (unprotected) SA

6 Parity error from G1 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

7 Parity error from G2 optics Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

8 Drop I/O equip fail/missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

9 Firmware/software incompatible Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

STM-4o equipment alarms


Table 2-6 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-4o equipment. These
alarms can be viewed in the STM-4o Equipment Alarms Provisioning
screen.
Table 2-6
STM-4o Equipment Alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA
2 Circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA
3 Circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA
4 Protection switch fail Minor nsa Enabled
5 Switch mode mismatch Warning nsa Enabled
6 Protection scheme mismatch Minor nsa Enabled
7 Protection path fail Minor nsa Enabled
8 Laser fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA
9 Protection switch complete Warning nsa Enabled
10 Manual switch request Minor nsa Enabled
11 Forced switch request Minor nsa Enabled
12 Lockout request Minor nsa Enabled
13 Invalid K-bytes Minor nsa Enabled
14 Firmware/software incompatible Minor nsa Enabled
15 Circuit pack reach mismatch Major SA Enabled
Minor nsa

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-33

Table 2-7 summarizes the common equipment alarms related to the STM-4o
equipment.These alarms are non-provisionable.
Table 2-7
STM-4o equipment alarms (Non provisionable)

Alarm label Severity level Service


2
code
(Note)

Autoprovision mismatch Minor (protected) nsa


Minor (unprotected) nsa
Quadrant mismatch Warning (protected) nsa
Warning(unprotected) nsa

STM-1o equipment alarms


Table 2-8 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-4o equipment. These
alarms can be viewed in the STM-1o Equipment Alarms Provisioning screen.
Table 2-8
STM-1o equipment alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Severity level Default


number (unprotected) (protected) status

1 Carrier Fail Critical (SA) N/A Enabled


2 Carrier Mismatch Critical (SA) N/A Enabled
3 Firmware/software incompatible Major (SA) N/A Enabled
4 Parity error from G1 Optics Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
5 Parity error from G2 Optics Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
6 Parity error to G1 Optics Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
7 Parity error to G2 Optics Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
8 Circuit pack fail Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
9 Add Circuit pack fail Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
10 Drop Circuit pack fail Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
11 Circuit pack mismatch Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
12 Circuit pack missing Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
13 Invalid K-bytes Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
14 Protection scheme mismatch Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
15 Tx Laser fail Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
16 Forced switch request Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
17 Lockout request Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
18 Manual switch request Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
19 Protection path fail Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
20 Protection switch fail Minor (nsa) Minor (nsa) Enabled
21 Protection switch complete Warning (nsa) Warning (nsa) Enabled
22 Switch mode mismatch Major (SA) N/A Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-34 Equipment procedures

ESI equipment alarms


Table 2-9 summarizes the alarms related to the External Synchronous
Interface (ESI) equipment. ESI equipment includes the ESI subunits and the
ESI Carrier. There are two types of ESI circuit pack available for use with
TN-16X (1.5Mbit/s and 2Mhz). These alarms can be viewed in the ESI
Equipment Alarms Provisioning screen.
Table 2-9
ESI equipment alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point code status
number

1 Subunit missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

2 Subunit mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

3 Subunit fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

4 Equipment protection switch fail Minor nsa Enabled

5 Equipment forced switch request Minor nsa Enabled

6 Equipment manual switch request Minor nsa Enabled

7 Equipment protection switch complete Warning nsa Enabled

8 Equipment lockout request Minor nsa Enabled

9 End VCO range Warning nsa Enabled

10 Timing generation entry to freerun Warning nsa Enabled

11 Failure to lock Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

12 Timing generation entry to acquire Warning nsa Enabled

13 Timing generation entry to fast Warning nsa Enabled

14 Timing generation entry to holdover Warning nsa Enabled

15 Subunit imcompatible Minor) nsa Enabled

16 Timing Distribution Fail Minor nsa Enabled

STM-16 equipment alarms


Table 2-10 and Table 2-11 summarize the alarms related to the interface
equipment for the STM-16 optical lines as follows.
Linear Systems
Terminal shelves in linear 1:1 and unprotected single-shelf applications have
the following optical circuit packs:
• STM-16 transmit (Tx) interfaces

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-35

• STM-16 receive (Rx) interfaces


• STM-16 demultiplexers
In multishelf 1:N systems, STM-16e Tx interfaces and STM-16e Rx
interfaces may replace STM-16 Tx and Rx interfaces.
2
On a terminal shelf equipped with high performance transmitter (HPTx)
circuit packs, STM-16 Tx interfaces must be replaced by STM-16e Tx
interfaces.
Ring Systems
MS SPRings have the following optical circuit packs:
• STM-16 ring Tx interfaces
• STM-16 Rx interfaces
• STM-16 ring demultiplexers
On a ring ADM node equipped with HPTx circuit packs, STM-16 ring Tx
interfaces must be replaced by STM-16e ring Tx interfaces.
Regenerator/Optical Amplifier
Regenerator/optical amplifier shelves have the following optical circuit packs:
• STM-16 regenerator/Tx interfaces
• STM-16 Rx interfaces
On a regenerator/optical amplifier shelf equipped with HPTx circuit packs,
one STM-16e regenerator/Tx interface must be equipped for each HPTx. In a
regenerator/optical amplifier shelf equipped with a mix of regenerator
channels and HPTx circuit packs, STM-16 regenerator/Tx interfaces can be
replaced by STM-16e regenerator/Tx interfaces. If there is not enough room
on the shelf to equip one STM-16e regenerator/Tx interface for each HPTx,
the additional STM-16e regenerator/Tx interfaces must be installed on a
second shelf co-located not more than 10 m from the first.

These alarms can be viewed in the STM16 Equipment Alarms Provisioning


screen.
Table 2-10
STM-16 equipment alarm points

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point (Note 1) code status
number

1 Rx circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

2 Rx circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

3 Rx circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-36 Equipment procedures

Table 2-10
STM-16 equipment alarm points (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point (Note 1) code status
number
4 Demux circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA

5 Demux circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

6 Demux circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

7 Signal fail between Demuxes Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

8 Demux parity error on all AU4s Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

9 (Note 2) Clock loss on Tx for AU4 1-4, 9-12 Minor nsa Enabled

10 (Note 2) Clock loss on Tx for AU4 5-8, 13-16 Minor nsa Enabled

11 (Note 2) Clock loss (other Tx) on AU4 1-4, 9-12 Minor nsa Enabled

12 (Note 2) Clock loss (other Tx) on AU4 5-8, 13-16 Minor nsa Enabled

13 (Note 2) Clock loss on Rx for AU4 1-4, 9-12 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA

14 (Note 2) Clock loss on Rx for AU4 5-8, 13-16 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA

15 (Note 2) Overhead link failure Minor nsa Enabled

16 (Note 2) Serial link failure between Demuxes Minor nsa Enabled

17 Demux firmware/firmware incompatible Minor nsa Enabled

18 Demux firmware/software incompatible Minor nsa Enabled

19 Tx circuit pack missing Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

20 Tx circuit pack mismatch Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

21 Tx circuit pack fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

22 to 37 Transmit parity error on AU4s (1 to 16) Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

38 (Note 2) Tx to Tx link fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

39 (Note 2) Demux to Tx link fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-37

Table 2-10
STM-16 equipment alarm points (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point (Note 1) code status
number
2
40 (Note 2) Tx sync fail on all quadrants Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA

41 (Note 2) Tx passthru fail on all quadrants Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

42 (Note 2) Tx passthru frame loss on all quadrants Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Critical (unprotected) SA

43 (Note 2) Tx overhead link failure Minor nsa Enabled

44 Tx laser fail Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

45 Protection switch fail (not provisionable) Minor nsa Enabled

46 Protection switch complete (not Warning nsa Enabled


provisionable)

47 Protection path fail Minor nsa Enabled

48 (Note 2) Lockout request (not provisionable) Minor nsa Enabled

49 Forced switch request Minor nsa Enabled

50 Manual switch request Minor nsa Enabled

51 Wait to restore override Major nsa Enabled

52 (Note 2) Protection scheme mismatch Minor nsa Enabled

53 (Note 2) Switch mode mismatch Minor nsa Enabled

54 (Note 2) Protection channel match fail Minor nsa Enabled

55 Invalid K-bytes Minor nsa Enabled

56 Extra traffic feature enabled Warning nsa Enabled

57 Automatic Laser Shutdown Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

58 (Note 3) Intercard data: DmxG1 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

59 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG1 to TxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

60 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: TxG1 to DmxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

61 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: TxG2 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-38 Equipment procedures

Table 2-10
STM-16 equipment alarm points (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point (Note 1) code status
number
62 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: TxG2 to TxG1 Major (protected) nsa Enabled
Major (unprotected) SA

63(Note 3) Intercard clock: TxG1 to TxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

64 Intercard clock: TxG2 to TxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

65 Intercard clock: TxG1 to DmxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

66 Intercard clock: TxG1 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

67 Intercard clock: TxG2 to DmxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

68 Intercard clock: TxG2 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

69 (Note 3) Intercard data: DmxG2 to DmxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

70 (Note 3) Intercard clock: DmxG1 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

71 Intercard clock: ESI G1 to TxG1 Minor nsa Enabled

72 Intercard clock: ESI G2 to TxG1 Minor nsa Enabled

73 Intercard clock: ESI G1 to TxG2 Minor nsa Enabled

74 Intercard clock: ESI G2 to TxG2 Minor nsa Enabled

75 (Note 3) Intercard data: DmxG1 to TxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

76 (Note 3) Intercard data: DmxG2 to TxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

77 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG1 to DmxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

78(Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG2 to DmxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

79 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG1 to TxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

80 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG2 to TxG2 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Major (unprotected) SA

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-39

Table 2-10
STM-16 equipment alarm points (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point (Note 1) code status
number
2
81 (Note 3) Intercard cntrl: DmxG2 to TxG1 Minor (protected) nsa Enabled
Major (unprotected) SA

82 (Note 3) Invalid neighbour detected Major nsa Enabled

83 (Note 3) Lockout protection operation fail Minor nsa Enabled

84 (Note 3) Lockout protection request Minor nsa Enabled

85 (Note 3) Lockout working request Minor nsa Enabled

86(Note 3) Extra traffic connection provisioned Warning nsa Enabled

Equipment performance alarms:

— Section Tx optical power (OP) threshold Warning nsa Disabled

— Section Tx laser bias current (LBC) Warning nsa Disabled


threshold

Note 1: Conditions on a channel that cause an automatic protection switch


are raised in software as minor, non-service-affecting alarms after a
2.5-second hold-off period (that is, MS FERF or MS AIS), even though the
switch occurs within the normal 60 ms period. When the condition is
cleared, the software alarm clears within 20 seconds. If traffic is forced
onto this channel from protection during this 20-second period, the alarm
is momentarily raised as critical, even though it is not service affecting. If
the alarms occur in unprotected circumstances (causing a loss of traffic),
they are designated service affecting (SA).
Note 2: These alarms apply to linear systems only.
Note 3: These alarms apply to STM-16 MS SPRings only.

Table 2-11
STM-16 regenerator equipment alarm points

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point code (Note) status
number

1 Regen Rx circuit pack missing Minor nsa Enabled

2 Regen Rx circuit pack mismatch Minor nsa Enabled

3 Regen Rx circuit pack fail Minor nsa Enabled

4 Regen Tx circuit pack missing Minor nsa Enabled

5 Regen Tx circuit pack mismatch Minor nsa Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-40 Equipment procedures

Table 2-11
STM-16 regenerator equipment alarm points (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


Point code (Note) status
number

6 Regen Tx circuit pack fail Minor nsa Enabled

7 Regen Tx laser Minor nsa Enabled

8 Regen Tx Rx-clock fail Minor nsa Enabled

9 Automatic Laser Shutdown Minor nsa Enabled

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-41

Performing a shelf inventory


This procedure displays all the circuit packs present on a specified shelf,
along with the shelf slot number, equipment identifier, serial number, Product
Engineering Code (PEC), version, and equipment state for each circuit pack.

Note: If a slot is provisioned but its circuit pack is not present, the
2
corresponding state field on the Shelf Inventory screen will show ‘Ueq’. If
a circuit pack is present in a slot that is not provisioned (that is, the
equipment was manually deleted), the corresponding state field will be
blank.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 2-8
Performing a shelf inventory

Step Action

1 Access the Shelf Equipment screen and select a shelf by entering:


equipmnt sh ↵
A screen similar to the following is displayed for a STM-16 terminal or Ring
ADM node.
FW00612A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
28 St.Tropez . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: < >
4 Shelf Position: <1>
5 Inventry Shelf Type: STM16 RingADM
6 ListCpks Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest Serial Number: A2D0280084
8 BackupDB Clock Source: ESI Exerciser: Off
9 Restore GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 11 Feb 93
10 Restart TimeZone: GMT
11 Edit EQ:
12
13
14
15 ACO
16 Exercise
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 28
Time 17:35 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-42 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-8
Performing a shelf inventory (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to the following is displayed for a STM16 regenerator shelf


FW00613A.

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
28 St.Tropez . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: < >
4 Shelf Position: <1>
5 Inventry Shelf Type: STM16 Regenerator
6 ListCpks Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest Serial Number: A2D0280084
8 BackupDB Clock Source: Throughtimed Exerciser: -
9 Restore GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 11 Feb 93
10 Restart TimeZone: GMT
11 Edit EQ:
12
13
14
15 ACO
16 Exercise
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 28
Time 17:35 >

2 Perform a shelf inventory by entering:


inventry ↵
The Shelf Inventory screen, similar to the following, is displayed.
FW00633A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
28 St.Tropez . . . . . . . .
Inventry
0 Quit Shelf Inventory Shelf: 1
2 ShPos: 1
3 Slot Type Equip ID PEC Version Serial No CpkState
4 Update 2 STM1e ---------- NTFW08AA 003 A1D167223
5 6 STM16 Rx SNTRNDT3AA NT8E02DB 015 A16130338
6 7 Demux SNPQNBJ2AA NT7E06AA 009 A1A180197
7 8 STM16 Tx SNTRHDB3AA NT8E01AB 001 A12168232
8 9 STM16 Tx SNTRHDB3AA NT8E01AB 001 A1F168237
10 Demux SNPQNBJ2AA NT8E06AA 009 A1C209021
9 11 STM16 Rx SNTRNDT3AA NT8E02DB 015 A11136247
10 19 Maint IF SNPQNA22AA NT7E23AA 018 A1C129822
11 20 ShlfProc SNPQAHV2AA NT7E20CC 006 A15036033
12 21 STM1e ---------- NTFW08AA 003 A1D167223
13 25 Carrier ---------- NTFW17AA
14 25-1I/O Port –––––––––– NTFW14AA
15 40 ESI Car SNPQNA82AA NT7E19AA
16 Page 1 of 4 Use F - Forward B - Back
17
18 Help INVENTRY:
NE 28
Time 17:35 >

3 To update the inventory screen, enter:


update ↵
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-43

Listing the circuit packs on a shelf


This procedure lists, in the conversation area, detailed information about the
provisioned slots on the shelf.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
2
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 2-9
Listing the circuit packs on a shelf

Step Action

1 Access the Shelf Equipment screen and select a shelf by entering:


equipmnt sh ↵
The Shelf Equipment screen is displayed.
2 List the circuit packs on the shelf by entering:
listcpks ↵
The circuit pack information is displayed in the conversation area.
A screen similar to the following is displayed to list the circuit packs on a
STM-16 terminal or Ring ADM node.
FW00634A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: < >
4 Shelf Position: <1>
5 Inventry Shelf Type: STM16 RingADM
6 ListCpks Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest Serial Number: A2D0280084
8 BackupDB Clock Source: ESI Exerciser: -
9 Restore GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 13 Oct 93
10 Restart TimeZone: GMT
11 Edit ListCpks
12 Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
13 Location: ShPos 1
14 Slot Type Equip ID PEC Version Serial No CpkState
15 ACO
2 - NTFW08 Ueq
16 Exercise 6 STM16 Rx SNTRNDT3AA NT8E02DB 015 A16130338
17 AlmProv 7 Demux SNPQNBJ2AA NT7E06AA 009 A1A180197
18 Help 8 STM16 Tx SNTRHDB3AA NT8E01AB 001 A12168232
9 STM16 Tx SNTRHDB3AA NT8E01AB 001 A1F168237
NE 1
Time 18:08 MORE...

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-44 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-9
Listing the circuit packs on a shelf (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to the following is displayed to list the circuit packs on a


STM-16 regenerator shelf.
FW00635A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: < >
4 Shelf Position: <1>
5 Inventry Shelf Type: STM16 Regenerator
6 ListCpks Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest Serial Number: A28038002
8 BackupDB Clock Source: Throughtimed Exerciser: -
9 Restore GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 13 Jun 91
10 Restart TimeZone: GMT
11 Edit ListCpks
12 Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
13 Location: ShPos 1
14 Slot Type Equip ID PEC Version Serial No CpkState
15 ACO
16 Exercise 9 STM16 Rx SNTRCDB3AA NT8E02AA 009 A10011160
17 AlmProv 10 STM16 TxRg SNTRFDB3AA NT8E03AA 005 A1101341C
18 Help

NE 1
Time 17:35 MORE...

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-45

Performing a shelf lamp test


This procedure performs a shelf lamp test. All the software-controlled LEDs
on the shelf’s circuit packs and software-controlled lamps on the shelf are lit
for 30 seconds.

Do not pull out any circuit packs while the lamp test is running. If a circuit
2
pack is removed during a lamp test and then reinserted after the test, you must
do another lamp test.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-10
Performing a shelf lamp test

Step Action

1 Access the Shelf Equipment screen and select a shelf by entering:


equipmnt sh ↵
The Shelf Equipment screen is displayed.
2 Perform a shelf lamp test by entering:
lamptest ↵
The lamps on the shelf and the LEDs on the shelf’s circuit packs light for 30
seconds.
Note: If at any time during system operation all shelf lamps light and stay lit,
they may be indicating failure of the shelf processor or maintenance interface.
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a shelf lamp test is performed.
FW00636A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: <1234.56>
4 Shelf Position: <3>
5 Inventry Shelf Type: STM16 RingADM
6 ListCpks Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest Serial Number: A28038002
8 BackupDB Clock Source: ESI Exerciser: Off
9 Restore GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 11 Feb 93
10 Restart TimeZone: GMT
11 Edit Lamptest
12 Lamptest command successful.
13
14
15 ACO
16 Exercise
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-46 Equipment procedures

Changing the shelf position number


This procedure assigns a label to the physical position of the shelf on the rack
framework (that is, position 1, 2, or 3).

The shelf position number appears on all Equipment screens.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-11
Changing the shelf position number

Step Action

1 Access the Shelf Equipment screen and select a shelf by entering:


equipmnt sh ↵
The Shelf Equipment screen is displayed.
2 Change the shelf position number by entering:
edit ↵
shpos <position number> ↵
where
<position number> is 1 to 3

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the shelf position number is
changed.
FW00641A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . 1 . . . . . .
1 Belfast . 1 . . . . . .
Edit Shelf
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3 Location: <1234.56>
4 Shelf Position: < 2>
5 Location Shelf Type: STM-16 RingADM
6 ShPos Shelf Function: < >
7 Function Serial Number: A2D0280084
8 Clock Source: ESI Exerciser: Off
9 GMT Offset (minutes): < 0> Shelf Date: 11 Feb 93
10 Offset TimeZone: GMT
11 ClockSrc
12
13
14
15 ShPos 2
16 ShPos command successful.
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-47

Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or


high performance transmitter
Use this procedure to change the provisioned output power value in dBm for
the selected optical amplifier or high performance transmitter (HPTx).

Requirements
2
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 2-12
Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or high
performance transmitter

Step Action

1 Access the equipment screen for the desired circuit pack by entering:
equipmnt <equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment type> is opamp or hptx
<circuit pack group> is g1 or g2 for an TN-16X terminal shelf
is g1 to g8 for an TN-16X regenerator shelf

The equipment screen for the selected circuit pack is displayed.


2 Edit the output power value of the selected circuit pack by entering:
editpwr <value> ↵
where
<value> is 3 to 11 for an HPTx or an optical amplifier in a
post configuration

A request for confirmation is displayed.


3
If you want to Then enter
confirm the change yes↵
cancel the change no↵

If you confirm the change, the output power value is changed for the selected
circuit pack.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-48 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-12
Changing the provisioned output power for an optical amplifier or high
performance transmitter (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the output power is changed
for an optical amplifier.
FW00987A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit OpAmp Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: OpAmp G1
3 Qıery Location: ShPos 5
4
5 LstAlms State: IS
6 AlmRpt Input Power: -15 dBm
Prov Output Power: +5 dBm
7
8 ChgState Amplifier Config: Post
9 EditThre LOS Threshold: -21 dBm
10 EditPwr Shutoff Threshold: -27 dBm
11 Shutoff Mode: Hard
12 EditMode Circuit Pack: OpAmp NT8E04AA Slot 17
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:06

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the output power is changed
for a high performance transmitter.
FW00988A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit HPTx Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: HPTx G1
3 Qıery Location: ShPos 5
4
5 LstAlms State: IS
6 AlmRpt
7 Prov Output Power: +5 dBm
8 ChgState Circuit Pack: HPTx NT8E05AA Slot 17
9
10 EditPwr
11
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:06

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-49

Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier


Use this procedure to edit the loss of signal (LOS) or shutoff threshold in
dBm for an optical amplifier. The LOS threshold is the input power level at
which a “Loss of signal” alarm will be raised. The shutoff threshold is the
input power level at which the laser will be turned off. 2
Note: It is possible to override the shutoff threshold. See Procedure 2-14,
“Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier,” in this document.

The thresholds are maintained in pairs. For example, when you set the LOS
threshold, the LOS clear is also modified, in order to maintain the hysteresis
region. The LOS clear threshold is set 1 dBm higher than the LOS threshold.
If, for example, the LOS threshold is set to -10 dBm, the LOS clear threshold
is set to -9 dBm. For the shutoff threshold, the shutoff clear threshold is set 6
dBm higher than the shutoff threshold. If, for example, the shutoff threshold
is set to -20 dBm, the shutoff clear threshold is set to -14 dBm.

The LOS alarm or the shutoff action may be inhibited if the corresponding
threshold is set lower than the default value or if the optical reflection
specification of -24 dB is not met. A disconnected or dirty connector may
inhibit these actions.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-13
Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier

Step Action

1 Access the OpAmp Equipment screen by entering:


equipmnt opamp <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<circuit pack group> is g1 or g2 for an TN-16X terminal shelf
is g1 to g8 for anTN-16X regenerator shelf

The OpAmp Equipment screen is displayed.


—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-50 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-13
Editing the LOS or shutoff threshold for an optical amplifier (continued)

Step Action

2 Select the threshold to be modified and the input power value by entering:
editthre ↵
<threshold> <value> ↵
where
<threshold> is output_shutoff or los
<value> is -40 to -8 for the shutoff threshold (see Notes 1
and 2)
is -30 to -2 for the los threshold. The los threshold
must be greater than or equal to the shutoff clear
threshold (shutoff clear = shutoff threshold + 6).

Note 1: The system will actually accept values between -40 and -2 for the
shutoff threshold. However, a value of greater than -8 will be rejected by the
verification process.
Note 2: Although the system accepts values as low as -40 dBm for the shutoff
threshold, setting this threshold below -30 dBm may inhibit the shutoff action.
A request for confirmation is displayed along with an information message
specifying the circuit pack which will be affected if the command is confirmed.
3
If you want to Then enter
confirm the command and change yes↵
cancel the command no↵

If you confirm the command, the selected threshold is set to the selected
value and the corresponding clear threshold is set.
A screen similar to the following is displayed when the shutoff threshold is
modified for an optical amplifier.
FW00989A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit OpAmp Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: OpAmp G1
3 Qıery Location: ShPos 5
4
5 LstAlms State: IS
6 AlmRpt Input Power: -15 dBm
Prov Output Power: +5 dBm
7
8 ChgState Amplifier Config: Post
9 EditThre LOS Threshold: -21 dBm
10 EditPwr Shutoff Threshold: -27 dBm
11 Shutoff Mode: Hard
12 EditMode Circuit Pack: OpAmp NT8E04AA Slot 17
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:06

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-51

Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier


Use this procedure to modify the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier. When
the shutoff mode is set to none, the shutoff threshold is ignored if the input
signal degrades to the shutoff threshold level. The optical amplifier continues
to attempt to transmit a signal, regardless of how weak the input signal is.
When the shutoff mode is set to hard, the laser is turned off when the input
2
signal degrades to the shutoff threshold level, and no signal is transmitted.

The shutoff action may be inhibited if the shutoff threshold is set to a value of
below -30 dBm or if the optical reflection specification of -24 dB at the input
connector is not met.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-14
Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier

Step Action

1 Access the Equipment screen for the desired optical amplifier by entering:
equipmnt opamp <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1 or g2 for an TN-16X terminal shelf
group> is g1 to g8 for an TN-16X regenerator shelf

The Equipment screen for the selected optical amplifier is displayed.


2 Edit the shutoff mode by entering:
edit mode <mode>
where
<mode> is none or hard

A request for confirmation is displayed along with an information message


specifying the circuit pack which will be affected if the command is confirmed.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-52 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-14
Editing the shutoff mode for an optical amplifier (continued)

Step Action

If you want to Then enter


confirm the command and yes ↵
change the shutoff mode
cancel the command no ↵

If you confirm the command, the shutoff mode is set.


A screen similar to the following is displayed when the shutoff mode is set for
an optical amplifier.
FW00990A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit OpAmp Equipment Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: OpAmp G1
3 Qıery Location: ShPos 5
4
5 LstAlms State: IS
6 AlmRpt Input Power: -15 dBm
Prov Output Power: +5 dBm
7
8 ChgState Amplifier Config: Post
9 EditThre LOS Threshold: -21 dBm
10 EditPwr Shutoff Threshold: -27 dBm
11 Shutoff Mode: Hard
12 EditMode Circuit Pack: OpAmp NT8E04AA Slot 17
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:06

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-53

Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a


high performance transmitter
Use this procedure to display detailed power information about a selected
optical amplifier or high performance transmitter (HPTx). This procedure is
executed from a command interface (CI) tool. 2
The querypwr command, which provides software access to the analog
maintenance feature through the network element user interface (NE UI),
allows the user to monitor the relative level of signal and amplified
spontaneous emission (ASE) noise present on an optical link, at the input and
output of each optical amplifier (provided the optical signal at its input was
generated using an HPTx) and at the output of an HPTx. This command can
also be used to identify the different signals present on the link and their
wavelength.

When network parameters are changed (for example, due to a change in the
gain of an optical amplifier, or a changed optical connection), the information
provided to the user by the querypwr command will be reliable only after a
stabilizing interval of five minutes for an HPTx and 15 minutes for an optical
amplifier.

If the output of an optical amplifier is shut off due to the absence of an input
signal, the output of the querypwr command will show 0% for all input and
output values, including residual power. If an optical amplifier or HPTx is not
in service, accurate output for the querypwr command can be obtained more
quickly by inducing a shut-off (for example by removing and replacing the
STM-16e connector at the HPTx faceplate). Reliable output will then be
available after an interval of one minute for an HPTx and six minutes for an
optical amplifier.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 2-15
Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a high
performance transmitter

Step Action

1 Invoke the CI tool by entering:


opampci↵
The CI tool is opened.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


2-54 Equipment procedures

Procedure 2-15
Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a high
performance transmitter (continued)

Step Action

2 Select the circuit pack to query by entering:


querypwr <service type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<service type> is opamp for an optical amplifier
is hptx for a high performance transmitter
<circuit pack is g1 or g2 for a terminal shelf
group> is g1 to g8 for a regenerator shelf

Power information is displayed at the bottom of the screen for the selected
optical amplifier or HPTx.
A screen similar to the following is displayed when the power information for
an optical amplifier is queried from the Shelf Equipment screen of a
regenerator shelf.
FW00991A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3
4 Location: < >
5 Inventory Shelf Position: <1>
6 ListCpks Shelf Type: STM16 Regenerator
Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest
8 BackupDB Serial Number: A090D03828 Exerciser: -
9 Restore Clock Source: ThroughTimed Shelf Date: - off
10 Restart GMT Offset (minutes): <0> Time Zone: GMT
11 Edit querypwr opamp g3
12 Power information for: OpAmp G3 on NE 33 Config : Post
13
14 Input Output
15 ACO Total Power -23.75 dBm + 8.50 dBm
16 Exercise 1553 nm 04.00 % 01.50 %
17 AlmProv 1557 nm 96.00 % 80.00 %
18 Help Residual Power 00.00 % 18.50 %

NE 1
Time 00:06

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Equipment procedures 2-55

Procedure 2-15
Displaying detailed power information for an optical amplifier or a high
performance transmitter (continued)

Step Action
2
A screen similar to the following is displayed when the power information for
an HPTx is queried from the Shelf Equipment screen of a regenerator shelf.
FW00992A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Shelf Equip
0 Quit Shelf Equipment Shelf: 1
2
3
4 Location: < >
5 Inventory Shelf Position: <1>
6 ListCpks Shelf Type: STM16 Regenerator
Shelf Function: < >
7 LampTest
8 BackupDB Serial Number: A090D03828 Exerciser: -
9 Restore Clock Source: ThroughTimed Shelf Date: - off
10 Restart GMT Offset (minutes): <0> Time Zone: GMT
11 Edit querypwr hptx g4
12 Power information for: HPTx G4 on NE 33
13
14 Input Output
15 ACO Total Power - 4.75 dBm +10.50 dBm
16 Exercise 1557 nm 100.00 % 100.00 %
17 AlmProv Residual Power 00.00 % 18.50 %
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:06

—end—
end of chapter

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-1

Facility procedures 3-
3
This chapter explains the provisioning procedures relevant to facilities on
TN-16X terminals in linear systems, add-drop multiplexers (ADM) nodes in
rings, and regenerators. The procedures include parameters for the TN-16X
subracks, which are used for Ring ADM nodes. These procedures are used to
test facilities and to assign traffic to them.

Chapter task list

Task Page

Displaying the status of facilities page 3-2


Displaying the Comms port performance statistics page 3-7
Displaying the Comms routing tables page 3-8
Displaying the nodes in the Comms network page 3-9
Activating or deactivating a facility page 3-10
Adding a facility to a network element page 3-15
Deleting a facility from a network element page 3-20
Changing the facility identifier page 3-24
Changing the Comm facility area address page 3-28
Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold page 3-30
Setting the 34M, VC4 and STM-1e signal-degrade threshold page 3-32
Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds page 3-35
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen page 3-37
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen page 3-42
Provisioning the facility alarms page 3-46
Provisioning Comm facility ports page 3-58
Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format (1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) page 3-61
Changing an ESI timing reference frame format (1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) page 3-63
Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO) (1.5 Mbit/s ESI only) page 3-65
Changing an ESI timing distribution source page 3-67
Changing an ESI timing distribution source page 3-67
Operating or releasing a 34M, VC4, STM-1e, 140M, or STM-1o loopback page 3-71
Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode page 3-74

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-2 Facility procedures

Displaying the status of facilities


This procedure displays the status of selected facilities, including the service
state, line coding, and configuration.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilities on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, vc4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4,
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M or VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-3

Procedure 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities (continued)Displaying the status of
facilities (continued)

Step Action

3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where 3
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
BiDir STM1e facility.
FW00647A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <----->
13 Add Framing: -
FWPUI: Loopback: None
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-4 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
BiDir 140M G3 facility.
FW00615A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
140M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G3
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: On
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
13 Add Framing: Off
Loopback: None
14 Delete FWPUI:
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:55 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of all STM-16
facilities for a TN-16X Ring ADM node.
FW00648A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . * . . *
1 Belfast . . . . * . . .
STM16 Fac --- *** Fields will remain blank until you change them *** ----
0 Quit All STM16 Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 All
3 Query State:
4
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Facility ID: <------------------------------------------->
7 MS SD Threshold: < >
8 ChgState
9
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete FWPUI:
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-5

Procedure 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
STM16 facility for an STM16 regenerator shelf.
FW00649A

Network View
1 Belfast
Critical
.
.
Major
.
.
minor warning
.
.
.
.
FailProt
*
*
Lockout
.
.
ActProt
.
.
PrfAlrt
*
.
3
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1 Eastbound
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt Facility ID: <STM16FACILITY-----------BELFAST------------>
7
8 ChgState
9
10
11 EditFID
12
13 Add
14 Delete FWPUI:
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
1.5 Mbits ESI timing reference facility.
FW00650A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Coding Format: B8ZS
6 AlmRpt Framing Format: Superframe
7 Signal Format: DS1
8 ChgState Line Build Out: -
9 Source: -
Timing Reference: -
10 Dt1Prot
11 Edit
12 TRefProt FACILITY:
13
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-6 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-1
Displaying the status of facilities (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected 2
Mhz ESI timing reference facility.
FW01112A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Signal format: 2MHz
6 AlmRpt Source: STMA
7 Timing Reference: STM16 G1
8 ChgState
9
10 Dt1Prot
11 Edit
12 TRefProt FA:
13
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
Comms facility.
FW00651A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
COMM Fac
0 Quit COMM Facility Shelf: 1
2
3 Status of OPC Assoc.: UP
4 Active OPC Name: OPCM001P
5 ListAlms NE Network Address: 49+0000522155B0600400
6 AlmRpt FWPUI:
7 AreaAddr FACILITY:
8 Ports
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:56 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-7

Displaying the Comms port performance statistics


This procedure displays the performance statistics for the communications
links.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846). 3
Procedure 3-2
Displaying the Comms port performance statistics

Step Action

1 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
2 Display the CommsPM status by entering:
CommsPM < status> <port type> <port number> ↵
where
< status> is periodic or history
<port type> is CNET or SDCC
<port number> is 1 to 4 for linear setup
is 1 to 40 for ring setup

A screen similiar to this is displayed showing the status of the selected


Comms port.
FW00652A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac COMM Facility Shelf: 1
0 Quit
2 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
3 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
4 NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt
7 AreaAddr
8 Ports
CommsPM history SDCC 1
9 LstNodes channel performance in 15 minute intervals (max. 8 hours of data)
10 Routes Shift performance data for LAPD SDCC 1 port 0
11 Insv Full Non Octet Error
12 CommsPM Start Time Interval Frames Rx CRC Error Frame Rate
13 ---------- -------- --------- --------- --------- -----
14 07:33:47 Y 94 0 0 0%
15 07:40:34 Y 114 0 0 0%
16 07:48:48 Y 97 0 0 0%
17 07:55:35 Y 113 0 0 0%
18 Help
08:03:49 Y 93 0 0 0%
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-8 Facility procedures

Displaying the Comms routing tables


This procedure displays a list of reachable nodes in the Comms network.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-3
Displaying the Comms routing tables

Step Action

1 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
2 Display the list of reachable nodes by entering:
Routes ↵
A screen similiar to this is displayed showing the list of nodes.
FW00653A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac COMM Facility Shelf: 1
0 Quit
2 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
3 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
4 NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
5 ListAlms
6 AlmRpt
7 AreaAddr
8 Ports
Routes
9 LstNodes Level 1 Forwarding Database - Default Metric
10 Routes Area Addresses: 49+0000
11
12 CommsPM NEID Name Cost Type
OPCM001P 4 ES
13 OPCM001B 4 ES
14 16 NE16 4 L1IS
15 <ID 09000000003F> 0 MCST
16 17 NE17 0 L1IS
17 (Network Address = Area Address + System ID + 00)
18 Help (ES=End System, LnIS=Level n Intermediate Systems)
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-9

Displaying the nodes in the Comms network


This procedure displays a list of all the nodes in the Comms network with
their character names and IDs.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846). 3
Procedure 3-4
Displaying the nodes in the Comms network

Step Action

1 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
2 Display the list of nodes by entering:
LstNodes ↵
A screen similiar to this is displayed showing a list of all the nodes on the
network.
FW00654A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac COMM Facility Shelf: 1
0 Quit
2 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
3 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
4 NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
5 ListAlms LstNodes
6 AlmRpt Name Type ID OPCTYPE STATUS
7 AreaAddr OPCM001B OPC 1 BACKUP INACTIVE
8 Ports OPCM001P OPC 1 PRIMARY ACTIVE
9 LstNodes NE16 NE 16
10 Routes NE17 NE 17
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-10 Facility procedures

Activating or deactivating a facility


This procedure places the selected facility or facilities in service (IS) or out of
service (OOS).

In the IS state, all the alarms for the facility are reported as either
service-affecting (SA) or non-service-affecting (nsa), as provisioned (refer to
Alarm and Trouble Clearing Procedures, 323-1201-543, for information on
alarms). Performance monitoring and protection switching are enabled for
STM-16, STM-40 and ESI only.

A facility cannot be placed in-service (IS) unless the associated equipment is


in service (see Procedure 2-3, ‘Activating or deactivating a circuit pack’ in
Chapter 2 of this document). The only exceptions are BitsA and BitsB, which
are not specifically associated with ESI subunits G1 and G2, and can
therefore be activated while the ESI circuit pack groups are deactivated.

In the OOS state, no alarms are reported for the facility (The exception is the
loopback alarm, which is reported for an OOS STM-1e or 140M facility and
an OOS VC4 or 34M facility on 1:N systems). A confirmation is required to
deactivate a facility.

Note: Each 34M facility has an associated VC4 ‘pipe’ facility. Any action
performed on a VC4 facility will affect the corresponding 34M ports.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

CAUTION
Risk of loss of data
This procedure may cause a loss of traffic.

Procedure 3-5
Activating or deactivating a facility

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-11

Procedure 3-5
Activating or deactivating a facility (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, vc4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4, 3
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M or VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-12 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-5
Activating or deactivating a facility (continued)

Step Action

4 Activate or deactivate the facility by entering:


ChgState <state> <direction>↵
where
<state> is is (in-service) or oos (out-of-service)
<direction> is add or drop for 34M and VC4 facilities only

a. If you change state from in-service to out-of-service, the system prompts


for confirmation (yes or no). To confirm the change to out-of-service,
enter:

yes ↵

To cancel the change to out-of-service, enter:

no ↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when the selected BiDir STM1e
facility is activated on an STM1e card.
FW00655A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <----->
13 Add Framing: -
FWPUI: Loopback: None
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-13

Procedure 3-5
Activating or deactivating a facility (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the selected BiDir 140M facility
is activated on a VC4e (140M) card.
FW00656A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
140M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G3
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: On
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
13 Add Framing: Off
Loopback: None
14 Delete FWPUI:
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:55 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when all the STM-16 facilities for the
selected TN-16X Ring ADM node are deactivated.
FW00657A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac ---- *** Fields will remain blank until you change them *** ----
0 Quit All STM16 Facilities Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 All
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <----------------------------------------->
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: < >
7
8 ChgState Yes
9 The ChgState command was successful in all cases.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 03:37 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-14 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-5
Activating or deactivating a facility (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the selected 2 Mhz ESI timing
reference facility is deactivated.
FW01113A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Signal format: -
6 AlmRpt Source: -
7 Timing Reference: -
8 ChgState
9
10 Dt1Prot
11 Edit
12 TRefProt ChgState OOS
13 ChgState command successful.
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the selected 1.5 Mbits ESI
timing reference facility is deactivated.
FW00658A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Coding Format: B8ZS
6 AlmRpt Framing Format: Superframe
7 Signal Format: DS1
8 ChgState Line Build Out: -
9 Source: -
10 Dt1Prot Timing Reference: -
11 Edit
12 TRefProt ChgState OOS
13 ChgState command successful.
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-15

Adding a facility to a network element


This procedure informs the network element software that a new facility is
being added to the NE. Because the NE automatically provisions cards when
they are inserted and on shelf power-up, it is only necessary to use this
procedure when a facility has been manually deleted and is to be added back.
The add command is therefore not required upon initial installation.

The add command fails if the user attempts to add a facility that already
exists.

A facility cannot be added without first adding the equipment associated with
3
it (see Procedure 2-3, ‘Adding a circuit pack to the system’, in Chapter 2 of
this document).

When this operation is completed, the facility is in the in-service state and the
newly added facility becomes the currently selected facility.

Note 1: STM1e/140M defaults to STM1e. You may need to change the


mode to a 140M facility.
Note 2: Each 34M facility has an associated VC4 ‘pipe’ facility. Any action
performed on a VC4 facility will affect the corresponding 34M ports.
Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-6
Adding a facility to a network element

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilities on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-16 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-6
Adding a facility to a network element (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4,
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-17

Procedure 3-6
Adding a facility to a network element (continued)

Step Action

4 Add the facility by entering:


add <direction>↵
where
<direction> is Bi, add, drop or both (for linear only) and is
specified only for 34M facilities 3
Note: The add command can also be entered as
add <circuit pack group><port><direction> ↵ for the Facility ‘all’ screen,
or for a different circuit pack group from the one in context.
where
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a BiDir STM-1e facility is added
to a TN-16X Ring ADM node.
FW00647A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <----->
13 Add Framing: -
FWPUI: Loopback: None
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-18 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-6
Adding a facility to a network element (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the selected BiDir 140M facility
is activated on a VC4e card. Note that a VC4e card defaults to STM1e when
first provisioned and must be manually changed.
FW00615A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
140M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G3
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: On
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
13 Add Framing: Off
Loopback: None
14 Delete FWPUI:
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:55 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-16 facility is added to


a TN-16X Ring ADM node.
FW00659A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM16 FACILITY.....BELFAST..HALIFAX...>
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7
8 ChgState
9 Add command successful.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-19

Procedure 3-6
Adding a facility to a network element (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-16 facility is added to


a STM16 regenerator shelf.
FW00660A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . * . . *
1 Belfast . . . . * . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1 Eastbound
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <......................................>
6 AlmRpt
7
8 ChgState
9 Add command successful.
10
11 EditFID
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-20 Facility procedures

Deleting a facility from a network element


This procedure informs the system software that a facility is being removed
from the network element. The facility must be deactivated, ie taken out of
service, before it can be deleted. To complete this operation, a confirmation is
required.

When a facility is deleted, the facility instance becomes ‘null’. The


corresponding work area for the deleted facility is not updated immediately
and cannot be accessed from another screen until the facility is added back
into the system and selected again.

On deletion of the last STM-16 facility, an alarm is activated.

If equipment is deleted and then added back, it reverts to its default state.
Note that if you delete then add a VC4e (140M) card, it will default to STM1e
default state.

Note: Each 34M facility has an associated VC4 ‘pipe’ facility. Any action
performed on a VC4 facility will affect the corresponding 34M ports.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

CAUTION
Risk of loss of data
This procedure may cause a loss of service.

Procedure 3-7
Deleting a facility from a network element

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-21

Procedure 3-7
Deleting a facility from a network element (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4, 3
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
Continue to Step 4.
3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the
eastbound or westbound circuit pack
groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
4 If the facility is not already set to the out-of-service state, deactivate it by
entering:
ChgState oos <direction>↵
where
<direction> is add or drop and is specified only for 34M and
VC4 facilities

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-22 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-7
Deleting a facility from a network element (continued)

Step Action

A request for confirmation is displayed.


To confirm the ChgState command, enter:
yes ↵
5 Delete the facility from the system by entering:
delete <direction>↵
where
<direction> is add or drop and is specified only for 34M and
VC4 facilities

A request for confirmation is displayed.


6 To confirm the command and delete the facility, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the deletion, enter:
no ↵
7 When deleting stm1e, 34M or 140M facilities, place the corresponding
equipment out of service as follows;
Access the equipment screen for the type of equipment required and select
the facility by entering:
equipmnt<equipment type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<equipment is stm1e, 34M or vc4e
type>
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 for STM1e and vc4e equipment
group> is g13 to g16 for 34M equipment

Deactivate the equipment by entering;


chgstate oos
The system prompts for confirmation of the change. To confirm the change to
out of service enter;
yes ↵
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-23

Procedure 3-7
Deleting a facility from a network element (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-16 facility is deleted


from a TN-16X Ring ADM node.
FW00661A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac ---------------------- *** Object deleted *** -----------------------
0 Quit STM16 Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query State: NULL
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM-16FACILITY....BELFAST..HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7
8 ChgState Yes
9 Delete command successful.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-16 facility is deleted


from an STM-16 regenerator.
FW00662A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac ---------------------- *** Object deleted *** -----------------------
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 3
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1 Eastbound
3 Query State: NULL
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <............................................>
6 AlmRpt
7
8 ChgState Yes
9 Delete command in progress. Please wait...
10 Delete command successful
11 EditFID
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-24 Facility procedures

Changing the facility identifier


This procedure allows a facility identifier to be assigned to a facility. The
facility identifier is a string of up to 38 characters which is used to uniquely
identify a facility.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (seeCommon
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-8
Changing the facility identifier

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4,
or stm16
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
Continue to Step 4.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-25

Procedure 3-8
Changing the facility identifier (continued)

Step Action

3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities 3
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the
eastbound or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
4 To edit the facility identifier of an STM-16 facility, enter:
editfid <facility id> ↵
where
<facility id> is up to 38 characters

Note: When typing the facility identifier, you should place it within single
quotes (‘<facility id>’); otherwise, all the text is converted to uppercase. This
should be done particularly if spaces or special characters (?, =) are included
or if the first character is a number.
5 To edit a 34M, VC4, or STM-1e/140M facility identifier, enter:
edit ↵
facid <facility id> <direction>↵
where
<facility id> is up to 38 characters
<direction> is add or drop and is specified only for 34M and
VC4 facilities

Note: When typing the facility identifier, you should place it within single
quotes (‘<facility id>’); otherwise, all the text is converted to uppercase. This
should be done particularly if spaces or special characters (?, =) are included
or if the first character is a number.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-26 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-8
Changing the facility identifier (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a BiDir STM1e facility identifier
is changed.
FW00663A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . 1 2 . . . *
1 Belfast . . 1 1 . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 3
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 FacID Facility ID: <..Facility identity up to 38 chars.. >
6 SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 AddSDTh Loopback: None Framing: -
8
9 Drop
10 State: IS
11
12 Facility ID: <..Facility identity up to 38 chars..>
13 SD Threshold: <----->
14 Loopback: None Framing: -
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a BiDir 140M facility identifier
is changed.
FW00664A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 FacID Facility ID: <140M No1 >
6 SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 AddSDTh Loopback: None Framing: -
8 DropSDTh
9 Drop
10 State: IS
11
12 Facility ID: <140M No2 >
13 SD Threshold: <----->
14 Loopback: None Framing: -
15
16
17 FacID TEST
18 Help FacID command successful.
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-27

Procedure 3-8
Changing the facility identifier (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a STM-16 regenerator facility


identifier is changed.
FW00665A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View
1 Belfast
STM16 Fac
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 3
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G2 Westbound
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM-16FACILITY....BELFAST...............>
6 AlmRpt
7 EditFID ‘STM-16FACILITY........BELFAST’
8 ChgState EditFID command successful.
9
10
11 EditFID
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 00:55 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-16 facility’s identifier is


changed on a TN-16X Ring ADM node.
FW00666A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM-16FACILITY....BELFAST....ONTARIO.....>
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7
8 ChgState EditFid ‘STM-16FACILITY....BELFAST....ONTARIO’
9
EditFid command successful.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-28 Facility procedures

Changing the Comm facility area address


This procedure allows you to add or delete an area address to a Comm
facility. The area address identifier is a string of up to 38 characters which is
used to uniquely identify an area address.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-9
Changing the Comm facility area address

Step Action

1 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
FW00651A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac
0 Quit COMM Facility Shelf: 1
2
3 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
4 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
5 ListAlms NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
6 AlmRpt
7 AreaAddr
8 Ports
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

Change the Comm facility area address by entering:


AreaAddr ↵
If you want to Then go to
add an area address step 2
delete an area address step 3

2 Add an area address by entering:


add <area address> ↵
where:
<area address> is up to 38 digits
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-29

Procedure 3-9
Changing the Comm facility area address (continued)

Step Action

3 Delete an area address by entering:


delete <area address> ↵
If you delete an area address, the system prompts for confirmation (yes or
no). To confirm the deletion enter:
yes ↵ 3
To cancel the deletion, enter:
no ↵
A screen similiar to this is displayed when a Comm facility area address is
changed.
FW00667A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Area Addr
0 Quit COMM Fac Area Address Shelf: 1
2
3 NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
4 Max Area Address : 3
5 ListAlms Supported Area Addresses
6 AlmRpt <49+0000 >
<Nil >
7 <Nil >
8 Ports AREAADDR:
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13 Add
14 Delete
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-30 Facility procedures

Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold


This procedure allows selection of the signal-degrade threshold for an optical
line receiver (STM-16 Receive Interface or STM-4o interface circuit pack).
The threshold can be set from 10-4 to 10-10. The default value is 10-6. If
during system operation the signal-degrade threshold is exceeded, a
protection-switch is initiated.

This procedure can be used for STM-16 facilities on terminals in MS SPRing


applications (ADM nodes in rings). The signal-degrade parameter is not set at
regenerator shelves. For multishelf 1:N applications, the signal-degrade
threshold can only be defined using the 1:N Protection Manager tool of the
operations controller (OPC). Refer to Protection Switching Procedures,
323-1211-311.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-10
Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold

Step Action

1 Access the Facility screen and select the facility by entering:


facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<facility type> is stm16 or stm4
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group> is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o facilities

The STM-16 or STM-4o Facility screen with the selected facilities is


displayed.
2 Set the signal-degrade threshold by entering:
editsdth <threshold> ↵
where
<threshold> is 4 to 10 (that is the exponent)

Note: If a specific circuit pack group (that is, not all) was selected in step 1,
you can press Return (↵) without specifying a threshold value to toggle the
threshold value by 10-1.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-31

Procedure 3-10
Setting the STM-16, STM-4o signal-degrade threshold (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility’s signal-degrade


threshold is set (anSTM-16 circuit pack is shown in this example).
FW00668A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Facility Shelf: 3
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM16 FACILITY....BELFAST..HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-7>
7
8 ChgState EditSDTH 7
9 EditSDTh command was successful.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the signal-degrade threshold is


set for all facilities for a TN-16X terminal or ring node (an STM-16 circuit pack
is shown in this example).
FW00669A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit All STM16 Facility Shelf: 3
2 Select Unit: STM16 All
3 Query State:
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <-------------------------------------------->
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-7>
7
8 ChgState EditSDTH 7
9 EditSDTh command was successful in all cases.
10 Dt1Prot
11 EditFID
12 EditSDTh
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-32 Facility procedures

Setting the 34M, VC4 and STM-1e signal-degrade threshold


This procedure allows selection of the signal-degrade threshold for the 34M,
VC4 and STM-1e facilities. The threshold can be set between 10-4 and 10-10
(VC4, STM-1e) or 10-4 and 10-9 (34M). The default value is 10-6. If during
system operation the signal-degrade threshold is exceeded, protection-switch
will not occur on the low speed tribs, however, the alarm ‘Add MS signal
degrade’ or ‘Add MS excessive errors’ will be raised.

This procedure can be used for 34M, VC4 or STM-1e facilities on TN-16X
MS SPRing applications (ADM nodes in rings).

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-11
Setting the STM-1e signal-degrade threshold

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, or stm1e
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g13 to g16, or all for 34M or VC4 facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M
facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-33

Procedure 3-11
Setting the STM-1e signal-degrade threshold (continued)

Step Action

3 Access the Edit Facility screen by entering:


edit
If the facility is Then go to
STM1e
34M
step 4
step 5
3
VC4 step 6

4 Set the STM-1e signal-degrade threshold by entering:


AddSDTh <threshold> ↵
where
<threshold> 4 to 10 (that is, the exponent)

Note: If a specific circuit pack group (that is, not all) was selected in step 1,
you can press Return (↵) without specifying a threshold value to toggle the
threshold value by 10-1.
Continue to Step 7

5 Set the 34M signal-degrade threshold by entering:


SDTh <direction> <threshold> ↵
where
<direction> is add or drop
<threshold> is 4 to 9 (that is, the exponent)

Note: If a specific circuit pack group (that is, not all) was selected in step 1,
you can press Return (↵) without specifying a threshold value to toggle the
threshold value by 10-1.
Continue to Step 7
6 Set the VC4 signal-degrade threshold by entering:
DropSDTh <threshold> ↵
where
<threshold> 4 to 10 (that is, the exponent)

Note: If a specific circuit pack group (that is, not all) was selected in step 1,
you can press Return (↵) without specifying a threshold value to toggle the
threshold value by 10-1.
Continue to Step 7
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-34 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-11
Setting the STM-1e signal-degrade threshold (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when an STM-1e facility’s signal


-degrade threshold is set.
FW00670A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . 1 2 . . . *
1 Belfast . . 1 1 . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 3
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 FacID Facility ID: < >
6 SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 AddSDTh Loopback: None Framing: -
8
9 Drop
10 State: IS
11
12 Facility ID: < >
13 SD Threshold: <----->
14 Loopback: None Framing: -
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-35

Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds


This procedure allows selection of the signal-degrade threshold for the 140M
facility in both the Add and Drop direction. The thresholds can be set from
10-4 to 10-10 for 140M in both directions. The default value is 10-6 for both. If
during system operation the signal-degrade threshold is exceeded,
protection-switch will not occur on the low speed tribs, however, the alarm
‘Add signal degrade’ or ‘Add excessive errors’ will be raised.

This procedure can be used for 140M facilities on TN-16X MS SPRing


applications (ADM nodes in rings). 3
Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-12
Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds

Step Action

1 Access the Facility screen and select the facility by entering:


facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<facility type> is 140M
<circuit pack group> is g1 to g8, or all for 140M facilities

The 140M Facility screen with the selected facilities is displayed


2 Access the Edit Facility screen by entering:
edit
The 140M Edit Facility screen is displayed.
3 Set the Add signal-degrade threshold by entering:
AddSDTh <threshold> ↵
where
<threshold> is 4 to 10 (that is, the exponent)

4 Set the Drop signal-degrade threshold by entering:


DropSDTh <threshold> ↵
where
<threshold> is 4 to 10 (that is, the exponent)

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-36 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-12
Setting the 140M Add and Drop signal-degrade thresholds (continued)

Step Action

Note: If a specific circuit pack group (that is, not all) was selected in step 1,
you can press Return (↵) without specifying a threshold value to toggle the
threshold value by 10-1.
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 140M facility’s Add and Drop
signal-degrade thresholds are set.
FW00671A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 FacID Facility ID: < >
6 SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 AddSDTh Loopback: None Framing: On
8 DropSDTh
9 Drop
10 State: IS
11
12 Facility ID: < >
13 SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
14 Loopback: None Framing: Off
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-37

Querying other facilities from a Facility screen


This procedure is used to query the service state and facility configuration
status for a facility or set of facilities other than those already displayed. The
query results are displayed in the conversation area at the bottom of the
screen, and therefore do not overwrite the original Facility screen.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
3
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-13
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4,
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-38 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-13
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
4 Query the other facility or facilities by entering:
query <circuit pack group> ↵
where
<circuit pack g1 to g16 or all for STM1e facilities
group> g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out, or all for ESI facilities

The output message is displayed in the conversation area, and therefore


does not overwrite the original Facility screen. When ‘More...’ is displayed on
the screen, the status for more facilities can be displayed by pressing the
Return key.
Note: Entering query ↵ has the same effect as entering query all ↵.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-39

Procedure 3-13
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility query is performed (an
STM-1e facility is shown in this example).
FW00672A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <----->
13 Add Framing: -
Loopback: None
14 Delete QUERY G1
15 Equipmnt NE ID: 12
16 Shelf: 1
17 AlmProv Unit State Lpback AddSDTh
18 Help
G1 Trbl None 1.0E-6
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility query is performed for
a TN-16X terminal or Ring ADM node (a n STM-16 facility is shown in this
example)..
FW00674A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM16 FACILITY....BELFAST..HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt MS SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7
QUERY ALL
8 Chgstate NE ID: 1 Belfast
9 Shelf: 1
10 Dt1Prot Unit State MS SD Threshold
11 EditFID
G1 IS 1.0E-6
12 EditSDTh G2 OOS 1.0E-6
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-40 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-13
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility is queried on an


STM16 regenerator shelf (an STM-16 facility is shown in this example).
FW00675A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1 Eastbound
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM16 FACILITY....BELFAST..HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt
7 QUERY ALL
8 Chgstate NE ID: 1 Belfast
9 Shelf: 1
10 Unit State
11 EditFID G1 Eastbound IS
12 G1 Westbound IS
13 Add G2 Eastbound IS
14 Delete G2 Westbound IS
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 1.5 Mbits ESI timing
reference facility query is performed.
FW00676A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Coding Format: B8ZS
6 AlmRpt Framing Format: Superframe
7 Signal Format: DS1
8 Chgstate Line Build Out: -
9 Source: -
10 Dt1Prot Timing Reference: -
11 Edit Query
12 TRefProt
13
14 NE ID: 1 Belfast
15 Equipmnt Shelf: 1
16 Unit State LCode FrameFmt SignalFmt LBO Source TimingRef
17 AlmProv BITSA IS B8ZS SF DS1 - - -
18 Help BITSB IS B8ZS SF DS1 - - -
G1OUT IS B8ZS SF DS1 Short STMB STM16 G1
NE 1 G2OUT IS B8ZS SF DS1 Short STMB STM16 G2
Time 13:47 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-41

Procedure 3-13
Querying other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 2 Mhz ESI timing reference
facility query is performed.
FW01114A

Network View
1 Belfast
Critical
.
.
Major
.
.
minor warning
.
.
.
.
FailProt
.
.
Lockout
.
.
ActProt
.
.
PrfAlrt
.
.
3
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Signal format: -
6 AlmRpt Source: -
7 Timing Reference: -
8 Chgstate
9
10 Dt1Prot
11 Edit Query
12 TRefProt
13
14 NE ID: 1 Belfast
15 Equipmnt Shelf: 1
16 Unit State LCode FrameFmt SignalFmt LBO Source TimingRef
17 AlmProv BITSA IS B8ZS SF DS1 - - -
18 Help BITSB IS B8ZS SF DS1 - - -
G1OUT IS B8ZS SF DS1 Short STMB STM16 G1
NE 1 G2OUT IS B8ZS SF DS1 Short STMB STM16 G2
Time 13:47 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-42 Facility procedures

Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen


This procedure is used to select a facility or set of facilities other than the
facility or facilities already displayed. The selected results overwrite the
original Facility screen with the details of the selected facility.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-14
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, VC4, stm1e, 140M, comm, stm1o, stm4,
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-43

Procedure 3-14
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities 3
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status.
4 Select another facility or facilities by entering:
select<circuit pack group> <Port #>↵
where
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1 to g8 or all for STM-4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out, or all for ESI
facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility is selected (an STM-1e
facility is shown in this example).
FW00647A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: < >
13 Add Framing: -
FWPUI: Loopback: None
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt FACILITY:
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-44 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-14
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a facility on an STM16


regenerator shelf is selected (an STM-16 facility is shown in this example).
FW00649A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM16 Fac
0 Quit STM16 Regenerator Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1 Eastbound
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM16 FACILITY....BELFAST..HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt
7
8 Chgstate
9
10
11 EditFID
12
13 Add
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 1.5 Mbits ESI facility is
selected.
FW00650A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Coding Format: B8ZS
6 AlmRpt Framing Format: Superframe
7 Signal Format: DS1
8 Chgstate Line Build Out: -
9 Source: -
10 Dt1Prot Timing Reference: -
11 Edit
12 TRefProt
13
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-45

Procedure 3-14
Selecting other facilities from a Facility screen (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 2 Mhz ESI facility is selected.
FW01115A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View
1 Belfast
ESI Fac
0 Quit
.
.

ESI Facility
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Shelf: 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
2 Select Unit: BITSA
3 Query State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Signal format: -
6 AlmRpt Source: -
7 Timing Reference: -
8 Chgstate
9
10 Dt1Prot
11 Edit
12 TRefProt
13
14
15 Equipmnt
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-46 Facility procedures

Provisioning the facility alarms


This procedure is used to provision facility alarms (STM-1e,140M, 34M,
STM-1o, STM-4o, STM-16, VC4, Comm, and ESI) so that an alarm is
generated when the related event occurs. The alarm points can also be
de-provisioned so that no alarm is generated when the related event occurs.

The NE user interface displays the active alarms. In addition, up to 50 of the


most recent alarms (active and cleared) are stored as the NE’s alarm history. If
an alarm is disabled (deprovisioned), it does not appear in the alarm history
list, but any historical instances reappear if the alarm is re-enabled.

The active alarms for an operations controller (OPC) span of control can be
displayed using the Alarm Monitor tool. A complete history of alarms logs,
and alerts for an OPC span of control can be displayed using the Event
Browser tool. Refer to Network Surveillance Procedures, 323-1211-510.

Note: Performance alerts can be provisioned to be raised as alarms. Refer


to Performance Monitoring Procedures, 323-1211-520.

Table 3-1 to Table 3-13 at the end of this procedure list the facility alarms by
category and in the order of their point numbers. Refer to Alarm and Trouble
Clearing Procedures, 323-1211-543, for descriptions of each alarm and the
associated troubleshooting procedures.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-15
Provisioning the facility alarms

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilitieson a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-47

Procedure 3-15
Provisioning the facility alarms (continued)

Step Action

2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is comm, 34m, vc4, stm1e, 140M, stm1o, stm4, 3
stm16 or esi
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM1e and 140M facilities
group> is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
is g1, g8, or all for STM4o facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM1o
facilities
is g13 to g16, or all for 34M and VC4 facilities
is bitsa, bitsb, g1out, or g2out for ESI facilities
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status. Refer to the following pages for examples of the various Facility
screen displays.
For all facility types except comm, the facility screen for the type of facility
specified is displayed, showing the facility status.
If you selected comm, go to step 4. If you selected any other facility type, go
to step 5.
3 Access the regenerator Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility stm16 <circuit pack group> <east/west> ↵
where
<circuit pack is g1, g2, or all for STM16 facilities
group>
<east/west> is e or w for regenerators to specify the eastbound
or westbound circuit pack groups

The Facility screen for the type of facility specified is displayed, showing the
facility status.
Go to step 5
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-48 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-15
Provisioning the facility alarms (continued)

Step Action

4 If you selected comm, as the parameter in step 1, enter the following


commands:
ports ↵
portprov ↵
dtlport <port type> < SDCC numbers> ↵
where
<port type> is sdcc or cnet
<SDCC number> is 1 to 4 for linear setup
1 to 40 for ring setup

The COMM Fac SDCC Details or COMM Fac LAN Details screen is
displayed.
5 Access the specified type of facility Alarm Provisioning screen by entering:
almprov ↵
The appropriate facility alarm provisioning screen is displayed.
6 Enable or disable the alarm point by entering:
editstat <alarm point> <state> ↵
where
<alarm point> is the number corresponding to the alarm in
the alarm provisioning screen
<state> is on or off, or press Return (↵) to toggle
between on and off

If you set an alarm point to off, the system prompts for confirmation. To
confirm the command and disable the alarm point, enter:

yes ↵

To cancel the command, enter:

no ↵
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-49

Procedure 3-15
Provisioning the facility alarms (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when facility alarms are provisioned
(an STM-1e facility is shown in this example).
FW00678A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt

3
Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
AlmProv
0 Quit STM1e Facility Alarm Provisioning Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3
4 # Alarm Point Status
5 ListAlms 1 Add STM1e MS FERF On
6 AlmRpt 2 Add STM1e MS AIS On
3 Add STM1e AU4 AIS On
7
4 Drop STM1e AU4 AIS On
8 5 Add STM1e loss of signal On
9 6 Add STM1e loss of frame On
10 7 Add STM1e out of frame On
11 EditStat 8 Add STM1e MS signal degrade On
12 9 Add STM1e MS signal errors On
13 10 Add STM1e MS excessive errors On
14
15 Page 1 of 2 Use F - Forward B - Back
16 ALMPROV:
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:54 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when facility alarms are provisioned
on a TN-16X Ring ADM node (an STM-16 facility is shown in this example).
FW00680A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . *
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
AlmProv
0 Quit STM16 Facility Alarm Provisioning Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM16 G1
3
4 # Alarm Point Status
5 ListAlms 1 Rx loss of signal On
6 AlmRpt 2 Rx loss of frame On
3 Rx AIS On
7 4 MS FERF On
8 5 Signal Degrade On
9 6 Channel ID mismatch On
10 7 Loss of extra traffic On
11 EditStat 8 Traffic squelched On
12
13
14
15 ALMPROV:
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:52 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-50 Facility procedures

34M facility alarms


Table 3-1 summarizes the alarms related to the 34M facilities. These include
tributary path alarms.
Table 3-1
34M facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Drop TU3 AIS Major SA Enabled

2 Drop VC3 excessive errors Major SA Enabled

3 Drop VC3 signal degrade Major SA Enabled

4 Drop VC3 signal label mismatch Major SA Enabled

5 Drop VC3 path trace mismatch Major SA Enabled

6 Drop VC3 path trace misalignment Major SA Enabled

7 Drop VC3 signal errors Minor SA Enabled

8 VC3 path FERF Warning nsa Enabled

9 VC3 path FEBE Warning nsa Enabled

10 Add 34M loss of signal Major SA Enabled

11 Add AIS Warning SA Enabled

12 Add excessive errors Major SA Enabled

13 Add signal degrade Major SA Enabled

14 Add signal errors Minor SA Enabled

15 Loopback Minor nsa Enabled

16 Facility/connection provisioning mismatch Warning (protected) nsa Enabled


Minor (unprotected) SA

17 Add buffer overflow Major SA Enabled

18 Drop buffer overflow Major SA Enabled

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-51

VC4 facility alarms


Table 3-1 summarizes the alarms related to the VC4 facilities. These include
tributary path alarms.
Table 3-2
VC4 facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Drop AU4 AIS Major SA Enabled


3
2 Drop AU4 Loss of Pointer Major SA Enabled

3 Drop VC4 excessive errors Major SA Enabled

4 Drop VC4 Signal degrade Major SA Enabled

5 Drop VC4 Signal label mismatch Major SA Enabled

6 VC4 path FERF Warning nsa Enabled

7 VC4 path FEBE Warning nsa Enabled

8 Drop VC4 signal errors Minor SA Enabled

9 Loopback Minor SA Enabled

10 Facility/Connection provisioning mismatch Warning (protected) nsa Enabled


Minor (unprotected) SA

11 Drop buffer overflow Major SA Enabled

12 Drop TU3-1 AIS Major SA Enabled

13 Drop TU3-2 AIS Major SA Enabled


14 Drop TU3-3 AIS Major SA Enabled

15 Drop TU3-1 loss of pointer Major SA Enabled


16 Drop TU3-2 loss of pointer Major SA Enabled

17 Drop TU3-3 loss of pointer Major SA Enabled

STM-1e facility alarms


Table 3-1 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-1e facilities. These
include tributary path alarms.
Table 3-3
STM-1e facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

STM-1 facility alarms

1 Add STM-1e MS FERF Warning NSA Enabled

2 Add STM-1e MS AIS Major SA Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-52 Facility procedures

Table 3-3
STM-1e facility alarms (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status
3 Add STM-1e AU4 AIS Warning SA Enabled

4 Drop STM-1e AU4 AIS Warning NSA

5 Add STM-1e loss of signal Major SA Enabled

6 Add STM-1e loss of frame Major SA Enabled

7 Add STM-1e out of frame Minor SA Enabled

8 Add STM-1e MS signal degrade Minor SA Enabled

9 Add STM-1e MS signal errors Minor SA Enabled

10 Add STM-1e MS excessive errors Major SA Enabled

11 Add STM-1e RS signal errors Minor SA Enabled

12 STM-1e loopback Minor NSA Enabled

13 Add STM-1e loss of pointer Major SA Enabled

ESI timing reference facility alarms


Table 3-4 and Table 3-5 summarize the alarms related to the ESI timing
references. The ESI timing reference facilities include the timing reference
inputs (BITSA and BITSB) and the timing reference outputs (G1OUT and
G2OUT). These alarm points can be viewed in the ESI Facility Alarm
Provisioning screen. Table 3-6 summarizes the non-provisionable ESI timing
references alarms.
Table 3-4
1.5Mbit/s ESI timing reference facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Loss of signal Minor nsa Enabled

2 Loss of frame Minor nsa Enabled

3 Rx AIS Minor nsa Enabled

4 Tx AIS Minor nsa Enabled

5 Degraded clock carrier Minor nsa Enabled

6 Bipolar violation Minor nsa Enabled

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-53

Table 3-5
2Mhz ESI timing reference facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Loss of signal Minor nsa Enabled

2 Output squelched Minor nsa Enabled

Table 3-6
ESI timing reference facility alarms (non-provisionable) 3
Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default
number code status

1 Reference switch complete Warning nsa Enabled

2 Reference switch fail Minor nsa Enabled

3 Reference forced switch request Minor nsa Enabled

4 Reference manual switch request Minor nsa Enabled

5 Reference lockout request Minor nsa Enabled

STM-1o facility alarms


Table 3-1 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-1o facilities. These
alarm points can be viewed in the STM-1o Facility Alarm Provisioning
screen.
Table 3-7
STM-1o facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Severity level Default


number (unprotected) (protected) status

1 Add STM-1o Loss of Signal Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

2 Add STM-1o Loss of Frame Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

3 Add STM-1o MS excessive errors Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

4 Add STM-1o MS FERF Warning (nsa) Warning (nsa) Enabled

5 Add STM-1o MS AIS Major (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

6 Add STM-1o loss of pointer Major (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

7 Add STM-1o channel ID mismatch Major (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

8 Add STM-1o MS signal degrade Major (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled

9 Add STM-1o AU4 AIS Major (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled

10 Add STM-1o MS signal errors Minor (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-54 Facility procedures

Table 3-7
STM-1o facility alarms (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Severity level Default


number (unprotected) (protected) status
11 Add STM-1o RS signal errors Minor (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled

12 STM-1o loopback Minor (nsa) Warning (nsa) Enabled

13 Add STM-1o out of frame Minor (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled

Note: SA: service affecting; nsa: non-service affecting. AIS: alarm


indication signal. FERF: far-end receive fail. MS: multiplex section. RS:
regenerator section.

STM-4o facility alarms


Table 3-8 summarizes the alarms related to the STM-4o facilities.These alarm
points can be viewed in the STM-4o Facility Alarm Provisioning screen.
Table 3-8
STM-4o facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Severity level Default


number (unprotected) (protected) status

1 Rx loss of Signal Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled


2 Loss of frame Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
3 Rx AIS (Note) Critical (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled
4 MS FERF (Note) Critical (SA) Warning (nsa) Enabled
5 Signal degrade Minor (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
6 Channel Fail Critical (SA) Minor (nsa) Enabled
7 Channel ID mismatch Major (SA) Major (SA) Enabled

Note: SA: service affecting; nsa: non-service affecting. AIS: alarm


indication signal. FERF: far-end receive fail. MS: multiplex section. RS:
regenerator section.

Comm facility alarms (CNET Port)


Table 3-9 summarizes the alarms related to the Comm (CNET) facility.
Table 3-9
Comms facility alarms (CNET Port)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service code Default


number status

1 CNET link fail Minor nsa Enabled


2 CNET performance degraded Warning nsa Enabled
3 CNET port degraded Minor nsa Enabled

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-55

Comm facility alarms (SDCC Port)


Table 3-10 summarizes the alarms related to the Comm (SDCC) facility.
Table 3-10
Comms facility alarms (SDCC Port)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service code Default


number status

1 SDH DCC link fail Minor nsa Enabled


2 SDH DCC performance degraded Warning nsa Enabled 3
3 SDH DCC hardware fail Minor nsa Enabled

Note 1: On an TN-16X regenerator shelf equipped only with optical


amplifiers or high performance transmitters, since these circuit packs do
not have access to the SDH overhead, the “SDH DCC link fail” alarm must
be disabled for both SDCC 1 and SDCC 2.
Note 2: On a 0:1 (unprotected) system, the “SDH DCC link fail” alarm
must be disabled for SDCC 2 to prevent the alarm from being raised
against the unequipped STM-16 G2 circuit pack group.
Note 3: On a TN-16X regenerator/optical amplifier shelf equipped only
with optical amplifiers or high performance transmitters, since these circuit
packs do not have access to the SDH overhead, the “SDH DCC link fail”
alarm must be disabled for both SDCC 1 and SDCC 2.
STM-16 facility alarms
Table 3-11 summarizes the alarms describing STM-16 facility alarms. These
alarm points can be viewed in the STM-16 Facility Alarm Provisioning
screen.
Table 3-11
STM-16 facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Rx loss of signal Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

2 Rx loss of frame Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected SA

3 Rx AIS Warning (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

4 MS FERF Warning (protected) nsa Enabled


Critical (unprotected) SA

5 Signal degrade Minor (protected) nsa Enabled


Minor (unprotected) SA

6 Channel ID mismatch (1:N systems Major SA Enabled


only)

7 Loss of extra traffic (link systems only) Major SA Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-56 Facility procedures

Table 3-11
STM-16 facility alarms (continued)

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

8 Traffic squelched Critical SA Enabled

Facility performance alarms:

MS Rx CV/ES/SES threshold 1, 2 Warning nsa Disabled

RS RX CV/ES/SES/SEFS Warning nsa Disabled


threshold 1, 2

Note: Conditions on a channel that cause an automatic protection switch


are raised as minor, non-service-affecting alarms in software after a 2.5
second hold-off period, even though the switch occurs within the normal
60 ms period. When the condition is cleared, the software alarm clears
within 20 seconds. If traffic is forced onto this channel (from protection)
during this 20-second period, the alarm is momentarily raised as a critical
alarm, even though it is not service affecting.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-57

140 M facility alarms


Table 3-12 summarizes the alarms describing 140 M facility alarms.
Table 3-12
140M facility alarms

Alarm Alarm label Severity level Service Default


number code status

1 Add 140M AIS Warning SA Enabled


2 Add excessive errors Major SA Enabled 3
3 Add 140M loss of frame Major SA Enabled
4 Add 140M loss of signal Major SA Enabled
5 Add buffer overflow Major SA Enabled
6 Add signal degrade Major SA Enabled
7 Add signal errors Minor SA Enabled
8 Drop AU4 AIS Major SA Enabled
9 Drop excessive errors Major SA Enabled
10 Far end block errors Warning NSA Enabled
11 Far end receive fail Warning NSA Enabled
12 Drop loss of pointer Major SA Enabled
13 Drop path trace mismatch Major SA Enabled
14 Drop signal degrade Minor SA Enabled
15 Drop signal errors Minor SA Enabled
16 Drop signal label mismatch Major SA Enabled
17 Drop 140M loss of frame Major SA Enabled
18 Drop 140M AIS Minor SA Enabled
19 Drop signal unequipped Major SA Enabled
20 Drop excess video jitter Minor SA Enabled
21 Drop buffer overflow Major SA Enabled
22 Loopback Minor SA Enabled

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-58 Facility procedures

Provisioning Comm facility ports


This procedure is used to provision the Comm facility ports.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-16
Provisioning Comm facility ports

Step Action

1 Access the Comm Facility screen by entering:


facility <comm> ↵
The COMM Facility screen is displayed.
FW00651A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Comm Fac
0 Quit COMM Facility Shelf: 1
2
3 Status of OPC Assoc. : UP
4 Active OPC Name : OPCM001P
5 ListAlms NE Network Address : 49+000000007550003400
6 AlmRpt
7 AreaAddr
8 Ports
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

2 Access the port prov screen by entering:


ports ↵
portprov ↵
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-59

Procedure 3-16
Provisioning Comm facility ports (continued)

Step Action

The COMM Facility PortProv screen is displayed.


FW00684A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Port Prov
0 Quit
2
3
COMM Facility PortProv
Type Number Prov Status
Shelf: 1
Alarm Connected To
3
CNET IS UP - LAN
4 SDCC 1 IS UP - G1 slots 7/8
5 ListAlms SDCC 2 IS UP - G2 slots 9/10
6 AlmRpt
SDCC 3 OOS DOWN - G1/G2 slots 7/10
7 AreaAddr
8 ChgState SDCC 4 OOS DOWN - G7/8 slots 36/38
9 LstNodes
10 Routes
11
12 CommsPM
13
14
15 DtlPort PORTPROV:
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

Note: For a ring system, the COMM Facility PortProv screen will list 1 to 40
SDCC channels.
3 Select the COMM Fac SDCC details screen by entering the following
commands:
dtlport <port type> < SDCC numbers> ↵
where
<port type> is sdcc or cnet
<SDCC number> is 1 to 4 for linear setup
1 to 40 for ring setup

The COMM Fac SDCC Details screen is displayed.


FW00685A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
SDCC Port
0 Quit COMM Fac SDCC Details Shelf: 1
2 Channel: SDCC 1
3 Provisioned : IS
4 Status : UP
5 ListAlms Connected To : G1 slots 7/8
6 AlmRpt Adjacent To : NE 16 NE16
Cost of the Link : 6
7 AreaAddr Alarm Text : -
8 ChgState Maximum Frame Size: < 1304>
9 LstNodes LAPD Number : 0
10 Routes
11 Edit
12 CommsPM
13
14 Ststs
15 DtlPort
16
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-60 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-16
Provisioning Comm facility ports (continued)

Step Action

4 Activate or deactivate the facility by entering:


chgstate < state> ↵
where
<state> is oos or is

If you change state from in-service to out-of-service, the system prompts for
confirmation (yes or no). To confirm the change to out-of-service, enter:
yes ↵
To cancel the change to out-of-service, enter:
no ↵
5 Return to the COMM Facility screen by entering:
quit ↵
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-61

Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format


(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only)
This procedure sets the External Synchronization Interface (ESI) timing
reference line coding format for an ESI timing reference facility. The line
coding format can be set to either B8ZS or AMI.

The ESI timing reference line coding format cannot be changed without first
deactivating the ESI timing reference facility.

Note: The ESI facility type cannot be accessed from regenerator shelves. 3
Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-17
Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format

Step Action

1 Access the ESI Facility screen and select the facility by entering:
facility esi <timing reference> ↵
where
<timing reference> is bitsa, bitsb, g1out or
g2out

The ESI Facility screen is displayed.


2 If the facility is not already out of service, deactivate it by entering:
chgstate oos ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
3 Change the line coding by entering:
edit ↵
lcoding <line coding> ↵
where
<line coding> is b8zs or ami

Note: Pressing return without specifying line coding, toggles it.


—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-62 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-17
Changing an ESI timing reference line-coding format (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the change of the timing
reference line-coding format
FW00686A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 LCoding Coding Format: B8ZS
6 FrameFmt Framing Format: Superframe
7 LBO Signal Format: DS1
8 Source Line Build Out: Short
9 Source: STMA
10 Timing reference: STM16 G1
11
12 LCoding B8ZS
13 LCoding command successful.
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

4 Return to the ESI Facility screen by entering:


quit ↵
5 Return the facility to the in-service state by entering:
chgstate is ↵
The state changes to in-service (IS).
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-63

Changing an ESI timing reference frame format


(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only)
This procedure sets the External Synchronization Interface (ESI) timing
reference frame format for an ESI timing reference facility. The frame format
can be set to either Superframe (SF) or Extended Superframe (ESF).

The ESI timing reference frame format cannot be changed without first
deactivating the ESI timing reference facility.

Note: The ESI facility type cannot be accessed from regenerator shelves. 3
Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-18
Changing an ESI timing reference frame format

Step Action

1 Access the ESI Facility screen and select the facility by entering:
facility esi <timing reference> ↵
where
<timing reference> is bitsa, bitsb, g1out or g2out

The ESI Facility screen is displayed.


2 If the facility is not already out of service, deactivate it by entering:
chgstate oos ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
3 Change the frame format by entering:
edit ↵
framefmt <frame format>
where
<frame format> is superframe or extended superframe

Note: Pressing return without specifying line coding, toggles it.


—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-64 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-18
Changing an ESI timing reference frame format (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the change of the timing
reference frame format.
FW00687A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 LCoding Coding Format: B8ZS
6 FrameFmt Framing Format: Superframe
7 LBO Signal Format: DS1
8 Source Line Build Out: Short
9 Source: STMA
10 Timing reference: STM16 G1
11
12 FrameFmt SF
13 FrameFmt command successful.
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

4 Return to the ESI Facility screen by entering:


quit ↵
5 Return the facility to the in-service state by entering:
chgstate is ↵
The state changes to in-service (IS).
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-65

Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO)


(1.5 Mbit/s ESI only)
This procedure sets the DS1 output timing reference LBO for an External
Synchronization Interface (ESI) timing reference facility. Table 3-13 provides
the distance associated with each of the different selections.

Table 3-13
ESI DS1 line build-out selections

Range DS1 3
Short 0 to 46 m (0 to 150 ft)
Medium 46 to 137 m (150 to 450 ft)
Long 137 to 200 m (450 to 655 ft)

The ESI timing reference line build-out cannot be changed without first
deactivating the ESI timing reference facility.

Note: The ESI facility type cannot be accessed from regenerator shelves.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-19
Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO)

Step Action

1 Access the ESI Facility screen and select the facility by entering:
facility esi <timing reference> ↵
where
<timing reference> is g1out or g2out

The ESI Facility screen is displayed.


2 If the facility is not already out of service, deactivate it by entering:
chgstate oos ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-66 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-19
Changing an ESI DS1 line build-out (LBO) (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the line build-out length by entering:


edit ↵
lbo <lbo length>
where
<lbo length> is short or extended superframe

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the line build-out length is set
for the ESI timing reference facility.
FW00688A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 LCoding Coding Format: B8ZS
6 FrameFmt Framing Format: Superframe
7 LBO Signal Format: DS1
8 Source Line Build Out: Short
9 Source: STMA
10 Timing reference: STM16 G1
11
12 LBO Short
13 LBO command successful.
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

4 Return to the ESI Facility screen by entering:


quit ↵
5 Return the facility to the in-service state by entering:
chgstate is ↵
The state changes to in-service (IS).
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-67

Changing an ESI timing distribution source


Use this procedure to select the timing distribution source for an external
synchronization interface (1.5Mbit/s or 2Mhz ESI) timing reference facility.
The ESI timing distribution source cannot be changed without first
deactivating the ESI timing reference facility.

Note: The ESI facility type cannot be accessed from regenerator shelves.

Requirements
Prior to carrying out this procedure, you must: 3
• be logged on the network element user interface and be at the main menu
level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface. (Refer to Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-20
Changing an ESI timing distribution source

Step Action

1 Access the ESI Facility screen by entering:


facility esi <timing reference> ↵
where
<timing reference> is g1out or g2out

The ESI Facility screen is displayed.


2 If the facility is not already out of service, deactivate it by entering:
chgstate oos ↵
A request for confirmation is displayed.
To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
3 Select the timing distribution source by entering:
edit ↵
source <td source>
where
<td source> is stma, stmb or tref

Note: STMA is the STM16 G1 optics, STMB is the STM16 G2 optics, TREF
is the active ESI reference.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-68 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-20
Changing an ESI timing distribution source (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when timing distribution source is set
for the 1.5 Mbit/s ESI timing reference facility.
FW00689A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 LCoding Coding Format: B8ZS
6 FrameFmt Framing Format: Superframe
7 LBO Signal Format: DS1
8 Source Line Build Out: Short
9 Source: STMA
10 Timing reference: STM16 G1
11
12 Source STMA
13 Source command successful.
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when timing distribution source is set
for the 2 Mhz ESI timing reference facility.
FW00689A
Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt
Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
Edit Fac
0 Quit ESI Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: G1OUT
3 Query State: OOS
4
5 Signal format: 2MHz
6
Source: STMA
7
8 Source Timing reference: STM16 G1
9
10
11
12 Source STMA
13 Source command successful.
14
15
16
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

4 Return to the ESI Facility screen by entering:


quit ↵
5 Return the facility to the in-service state by entering:
chgstate is ↵
The state changes to in-service (IS).
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-69

Changing an ESI primary or secondary input timing reference source


This procedure allows the output timing reference source to be set for an
External Synchronization Interface (1.5 Mbit/s or 2Mhz ESI) timing
reference facility.

Note: The ESI facility type cannot be accessed from regenerator shelves.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level. 3
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

Procedure 3-21
Changing an ESI primary or secondary input timing reference source

Step Action

1 Access the ESI Protection screen by entering:


protectn↵
trefprot↵
The ESI Protection screen is displayed.
Note: The timing reference source cannot be changed for the currently active
timing facility.
2 To set the timing reference source to the primary source, enter:
pritsrc ↵
<timing source> ↵
To set the timing reference source to the secondary source, enter:
sectsrc ↵
<timing source> ↵
where
<timing source> is bitsa, bitsb, stma, stmb or null

Note: If STMA or STMB is selected as a timing source in a ring configuration,


care must be taken to avoid inadvertently creating a timing loop. Refer to
TN-16X System Description, 323-1211-100.
A warning message and a request for confirmation are displayed.
3 To confirm the change, enter:
Yes ↵
To cancel the change, enter:
No ↵
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-70 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-21
Changing an ESI primary or secondary input timing reference
source (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when the ESI timing reference input
source is set.
FW00690A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
ESI RefProt
0 Quit ESI Reference Protection Shelf: 1
2 Protectn Scheme: 1+1
3
4
5 ListAlms Source State Lockout Forced AutoSw Manual
6 AlmRpt PRI BITSA IS Standby . . . .
7 Lockout SEC BITSB IS Active . . . .
8 Forced
9 Manual
10 Dt1Prot
11
12 PriTSrc PritSrc BitsA
13 SecTSrc PritSrc command successful
14
15 Equipmnt
16 Facility
17
18 Help
NE 1
Time 13:47 >

—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-71

Operating or releasing a 34M, VC4, STM-1e, 140M, or STM-1o


loopback
Use this procedure to operate or release a 34M, VC4, STM-1e, 140 M, or
STM-1o facility (FAC) or terminal (TERM) loopback at the selected network
element. Facilities must be deactivated (out of service) before a loopback can
be performed on them.

The TERM loopback is used to loop the selected signal back over the optics
and to send a terminal alarm indication signal (AIS) to the facility output port.
The FAC loopback is used to loop the selected incoming signal back to the 3
corresponding output port and to send a facility AIS over the optics. Refer to
Software Description, 323-1211-101, for more information on FAC and
TERM loopbacks.

Note 1: All loopbacks are released after a restart or reboot. However, the
facility remains out of service.
Note 2: The 34M facility has only FAC loopback and the VC4 facility has
only TERM loopback. Both are only available on 1:N systems.
Note 3: Each 34M facility has an associated VC4 ‘pipe’ facility.
Performing a loopback on a VC4 facility will require the corresponding
34M ports to be placed OOS.
Requirements
Prior to carrying out this procedure, you must:
• be logged on the network element user interface and be at the main menu
level.
• be familiar with the VT100-type network element user interface. (Refer to
Common Procedures , 323-1211-846).
Procedure 3-22
Operating or releasing a VC4, 34M, STM1o, STM1e or 140M loopback

Step Action

1 Access the Facility screen by entering:


facility <facility type> <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<facility type> is 34m, vc4, stm1e,140M, or stm1o
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 or all for STM-1e or 140M
group> is g13 to g16, or all for 34M facilities
is g1a /g1b to g16a /g16b, or all for STM-1o
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all and is specified only for 34M facilities

The appropriate facility screen is displayed, showing the facility status.


—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-72 Facility procedures

Procedure 3-22
Operating or releasing a VC4, 34M, STM1o, STM1e or 140M
loopback (continued)

Step Action

2 If the facility is not already out of service, deactivate it by entering:


ChgState oos<direction>↵
where
<direction> is add or drop for 34M and VC4 facilities only

A request for confirmation is displayed.


3 To confirm the chgstate command, enter:
yes ↵
4 To operate the loopback enter:
loopback op ↵
<type of loopback> ↵
where
<type of is fac (facility) or term (terminal) and is specified
loopback> for STM-1o, STM-1e and140M facilities only.

To release the loopback enter:


loopback re↵
A screen similar to this one is displayed when a STM1e terminal (Near End)
loopback is operated.
FW00691A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
STM1e Fac
0 Quit BiDir STM1e Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: STM1e G1
3 Query Add State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <STM1eFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: Terminal (Near End) Framing: -
8 ChgState
9 Drop State: OOS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: <STM1eFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
SD Threshold: <----->
13 Add
Loopback: Terminal (Near End) Framing: -
14 Delete
15 Equipmnt
16 Loopback op term
Loopback command was successful.
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:53 >

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-73

Procedure 3-22
Operating or releasing a VC4, 34M, STM1o, STM1e or 140M
loopback (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 140M terminal (Near End)
loopback is operated.
FW00692A

Network View
Critical
.
Major
.
minor warning
. .
FailProt
.
Lockout
.
ActProt
.
PrfAlrt
.
3
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
140M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G1
3 Query Add State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <140MFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: Terminal (Near End) Framing: -
8 Chgstate
9
Drop State: OOS
10 DtlProt
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: <140MFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
13 Add SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
14 Delete Loopback: Terminal (Near End) Framing: -
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv Loopback op term
18 Help Loopback command was successful.

NE 1
Time 17:35 >

A screen similar to this one is displayed when a 140M facility (Far End)
loopback is operated.
FW00693A

Critical Major minor warning FailProt Lockout ActProt PrfAlrt


Network View . . . . . . . .
1 Belfast . . . . . . . .
140M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 140M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: VC4e G1
3 Query Add State: OOS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: <140MFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: Facility (Far End) Framing: -
8 Chgstate
9
Drop State: OOS
10 DtlProt
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: <140MFACILITY.....BELFAST.....HALIFAX.....>
13 Add SD Threshold: < >
14 Delete Loopback: Facility (Far End) Framing: -
15 Equipment
16
17 AlmProv Loopback op fac
18 Help Loopback command was successful.

NE 1
Time 17:35 >

—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


3-74 Facility procedures

Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode


This procedure sets the operating mode of the drop direction video
desynchronizer on the 34M tributary card to either Video or Telephony, the
default mode being Video.

The desynchronizer mode cannot be changed without first putting the facility
(drop direction only for uni facilities) in the OOS state.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
• You must be logged on the NE user interface and be at the main menu level.
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type NE user interface (see Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846).

CAUTION
Risk of loss of data
This procedure may cause a loss of traffic.

Procedure 3-23
Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode

Step Action

1 If you are accessing facilities on a terminal or ADM shelf, continue to step 2.


If you are accessing facilities on a regenerator shelf, go to step 3.
2 Access the terminal/ADM Facility screen for the type of facility required and
select the facility by entering:
facility 34M <circuit pack group> <port #>↵
where
<circuit pack group> is g13 to g16, or all
<port #> is 1, 2, 3 or all

The Facility screen is displayed, showing the facility status.


3 Access the regenerator Facility screen and select the desynchronization
mode by entering:
DsynMode <mode> ↵
where
<mode> is Video or Telephony

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Facility procedures 3-75

Procedure 3-23
Changing the 34M desynchronizer mode (continued)

Step Action

A screen similar to this one is displayed showing the status of the selected
BiDir 34M facility.
FW01245A

Network View
1 Belfast
Critical
.
.
Major
.
.
minor warning
.
.
.
.
FailProt
.
.
Lockout
.
.
ActProt
.
.
PrfAlrt
.
.
3
34M Fac
0 Quit BiDir 34M Facility Shelf: 1
2 Select Unit: 34M G13 Port: 1
3 Query Add State: IS
4
5 ListAlms Facility ID: < >
6 AlmRpt SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
7 Loopback Loopback: None
8 ChgState
9 DsynMode Drop State: IS
10
11 Edit
12 Facility ID: < >
SD Threshold: <1.0E-6>
13 Add
Loopback: None
14 Delete DsynMode: Video
15 Equipmnt
16 sil
17 AlmProv
18 Help
NE 1
Time 09:55 >

—end—

end of chapter

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-1

Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-


This chapter contains procedures for managing a ring configuration. Most of
these functions are provided through the operations controller (OPC)
Configuration Manager tool. In addition, you can display the node ID and
node map for a given add-drop multiplexer (ADM) node through the
command input area of the network element user interface (NE UI).
4
The Configuration Manager tool is contained in the Network Admin toolset.
The tool allows you to create and modify ring configuration data for the
STM-16 optical two-fibre, multiplex section shared protection ring (MS
SPRing). The procedures in this chapter describe only a subset of the
Configuration Manager's functionality. The full set of Configuration Manager
procedures are listed in the section titled ‘Master task list’.

In this chapter, NEs are referred to by their function, and are called ring
ADMs.

Up to 16 ring ADMs can be configured in the ring. These ring ADMs can be
in the same OPC span of control or distributed among several OPC spans of
control. Regenerators are not listed in the tool.

You will most likely use the Configuration Manager: Ring when creating or
upgrading a ring configuration (see Table 4-1).

For a description of the Configuration Manager refer to User Interfaces


Description, 323-1211-301.

Restrictions and limitations


The Configuration Manager: Ring confirms that the CPG connections that
you enter form a valid, closed ring. The tool does not show the current state of
the CPG facilities when the ring configuration is created. You must ensure
that the appropriate equipment is installed and that the facilities are
provisioned using the NE user interface.

You can only open one instance of the Configuration Manager: Ring at a time.

Configuration changes cannot be made while the backup OPC is active.


Although the Configuration Manager: Ring can be opened in this case, you
cannot change the configuration data until the primary OPC becomes active
again.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-2 Configuring the TN-16X ring

While the Configuration Manager: Ring is open, you cannot open the
Connection Manager. This ensures that STM-1e, 34M, 140M or VC4
electrical connection data is not changed while the configuration is being
changed. Similarly, you cannot open the Configuration Manager: Ring while
the Connection Manager is open.

If a ring configuration contains ADMs from other OPC spans of control, you
must make all configuration changes at each primary OPC individually.

Master task list


It is unlikely that you will use the Configuration Manager: Ring by itself. To
manage a ring configuration, it is necessary to use the Configuration
Manager: Ring in combination with installation procedures, procedures
performed at the NE user interface, and procedures using other OPC tools.
Table 4-1 identifies configuration management tasks that use the
Configuration Manager: Ring.
Table 4-1
Configuration tasks

Task See

Create a new ring configuration Commissioning and Site Testing Procedures,


323-1211-220.

Display ring ADMs in a configuration Procedure 4-1.

Add a ring ADM to an existing configuration System Expansion Procedures,


323-1211-224.

Delete a ring ADM from an existing configuration System Expansion Procedures,


323-1211-224.

Delete a ring configuration System Expansion Procedures,


323-1211-224.
Reposition an existing ring ADM System Expansion Procedures,
323-1211-224.

Audit configuration data for all ADMs in a ring Procedure 4-2.

Audit configuration data at a ring ADM Procedure 4-3

Schedule an audit of configuration data Procedure 4-4

Transfer configuration data to the backup OPC Procedure 4-5

Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM Procedure 4-6

Edit the ring configuration name Procedure 4-6

Upgrading from a regenerator to an ADM System Expansion Procedures,


323-1211-224.

Upgrade from a linear to a ring configuration Your Nortel representative

Display the node map for a network element using the Procedure 4-8
network element user interface

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-3

Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration


Use this procedure to display all ring ADMs that have previously been
configured in the ring. The procedure describes how to display the list of ring
ADMs, starting at a specified ADM in the ring, and listing the ADMs in either
direction around the ring. The procedure also describes how to display details
for a selected ring ADM.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846.
4
Procedure 4-1
Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see the procedures in Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the available
configurations. The first configuration is highlighted.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

2 Move to the ring you want to display (using the arrow keys).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-4 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-1
Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration (continued)

Step Action

4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialog is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]


Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6
If you want to Then
sort the list go to step 7
display details for a selected ring ADM go to step 10
close the tool End of procedure
Go to step 13

7 Tab to the Configured Ring ADM list and move to the ring ADM that you want
to appear first in the list.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-5

Procedure 4-1
Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration (continued)

Step Action

8 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW00236A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring.

Configured Ring ADM


12
APS ID
12
G1 Neighbor ADM
10
G1 1Neighbor
Details ADM
11 2 Edit... >>
4
10 10 12 11 3 Delete
11 11 12 10
4 Retrieve Transport Info

5 Audit
6 Send
7 Info on last command

8 Select
9 Deselect
10 Sort list >>
2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]
11 Help ♦H
3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

9 Move to the Sort list command and, using the arrow keys, move to the
cascade menu.
The cascade menu appears, displaying the G1 and G2 options.
If Then
G1 direction of the Select from CPG G1 of this ADM by pressing Space
ring ADM (or Keypad 0).
G2 direction of the Move to from CPG G2 of this ADM and select it by
ring ADM pressing Space (or Keypad 0).

Items in the list are sorted according to the selected command.


Go to step 6.
10 Move to the item for which you want to display details and display the list item
menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-6 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-1
Displaying ring ADMs in a configuration (continued)

Step Action

11 Select the Details command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).


The Ring ADM Configuration Details dialogue is displayed.
FW00694A

Ring ADM Configuration Details:

Network Element: 12

Ring ADM ID: 12

This ADM’s STM16 CPG G1 fibers connect to neighbor


ADM: 10 STM16 CPG: G1

This ADM’s STM16 CPG G2 fibers connect to neighbor

ADM: 11 STM16 CPG: G1

[ OOK ♦Return ]

12 To close the dialogue, select the OK button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Ring ADM Configuration Details dialogue is removed.
13 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-7

Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring


Use this procedure to conduct an immediate audit of all ADMs in the ring that
are under the OPC span of control. Configuration data at all ring ADMs is
compared with data stored at the OPC.

The Configuration Manager displays the results of the audit immediately and
allows you to overwrite the ring ADM configuration data if discrepancies are
found.

To initiate an audit of a selected ring ADM, see Procedure 4-3. To schedule an


audit for a later time and date, see Procedure 4-4.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
4
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846.

Procedure 4-2
Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see the procedures in Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the available
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-8 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-2
Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring (continued)

Step Action

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialog is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]


Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-9

Procedure 4-2
Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring (continued)

Step Action

6 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad,).


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00695A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology:
1 Audit Ring
configuration Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1] 2 Schedule configuration audit...

Procedure: None selected. 3 Transfer data to backup OPC ♦J


Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

4
4 Edit configuration name

5 Delete configuration
Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM
12 12 10 6 Help 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

7 Select the Audit configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00696A

This operation will audit the ring configuration


data at all ring ADMs in this configuration.

Do you wish to continue?


[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

8 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) .
If the configuration audit is Then go to
successful step 9
not successful step 10

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-10 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-2
Auditing configuration data for all ADMs in a ring (continued)

Step Action

9 A dialogue is displayed, indicating the results of the audit.


FW00697A

Information The configuration data audit has completed with the


following results:
Audit successful for NE
10, 11, 12.

[ Done
D ♦Return ]

Select Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed.
Go to step 13.
10 A dialogue appears, indicating the results of the audit.
If you Then go to
want to overwrite the ring ADM configuration data step 11
do not want to overwrite the ring ADM configuration data step 12

11 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The dialogue is removed. Configuration data at the affected ring ADMs is
overwritten by the OPC configuration data.
Go to step 13.
12 In the dialogue, select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The dialogue is removed. All ring ADMs retain their original configuration
data.
13 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-11

Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM


Use this procedure to conduct an immediate audit of configuration data at a
selected ring ADM. Configuration data at that ring ADM is compared with
data stored at the OPC.

The Configuration Manager displays the results of the audit immediately. If


the audit discovers discrepancies, the tool gives you the opportunity to
overwrite the existing configuration data at the affected ring ADM.

To initiate an audit of all ring ADMs in the OPC span of control, see
Procedure 4-2. To schedule an audit for a later time and date, see
Procedure 4-4.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following: 4
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 4-3
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the available
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-12 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-3
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]


Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6 Tab to the Configured Ring ADM list and move the ring ADM to be audited.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-13

Procedure 4-3
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

7 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW00236A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G1 1Neighbor


Details ADM
4
12 12 10 11 2 Edit... >>
10 10 12 11 3 Delete
11 11 12 10
4 Retrieve Transport Info

5 Audit
6 Send
7 Info on last command

8 Select
9 Deselect
10 Sort list >>
2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]
11 Help ♦H
3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

8 Move to the Audit command and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The following confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00698A

This operation will audit the configuration data


at 12.

Do you wish to continue?

[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

9 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
If the configuration data audit Then go to
is successful step 14
is not successful step 10

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-14 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-3
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

10 A dialogue like the following appears, indicating the results of the audit.
FW00699A

The configuration data audit has completed with the


following results:

Mismatch(es) found for NE


12

Do you wish to correct mismatched data at the


indicated ring ADM(s)?

[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

If Then
want to overwrite the data at the ring ADM step 12
do not want to overwrite the data at the ring ADM step 11

11 Select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed.
Go to step 15.
12 To overwrite the data at the ring ADM, tab to the Yes button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The dialogue is removed. Configuration data at the NE is overwritten and a
dialogue like the following is displayed.
FW00700A

Information The configuration mismatches were corrected


successfully.

[ Done ♦Return ]

13 Select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed.
Go to step 15.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-15

Procedure 4-3
Auditing configuration data at a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

14 A dialogue like the following is displayed.


FW00701A

Information The configuration data audit has completed with the


following results:
Audit successful for NE
12.

[ Done
D ♦Return ]

4
15 Select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The dialogue is removed.
16 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-16 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Scheduling an audit of configuration data


Use this procedure to specify the start time and date as well as the frequency
for a connection data audit.

The OPC configuration data is compared with data from all ring ADMs in the
OPC span of control. Results of the audit are found in the Event Browser. Any
discrepancies are noted in the Event Browser. They are not corrected
automatically by the Configuration Manager.

Note: The start date for a scheduled audit must be either today or
tomorrow. Any other date that you enter is invalid and the tool prompts you
to enter another date.

To conduct an immediate audit of all ring ADMs in the OPC span of control,
see Procedure 4-2. To conduct an immediate audit of a selected ring ADM,
see Procedure 4-3.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-17

Procedure 4-4
Scheduling an audit of configuration data

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the ring
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

4
Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-18 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-4
Scheduling an audit of configuration data (continued)

Step Action

5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]


Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad,).


The Utilities menu is displayed
FW00695A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology:
1 Audit Ring
configuration Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1] 2 Schedule configuration audit...

Procedure: None selected. 3 Transfer data to backup OPC ♦J


Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.
4 Edit configuration name

5 Delete configuration
Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM
12 12 10 6 Help 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-19

Procedure 4-4
Scheduling an audit of configuration data (continued)

Step Action

7 Move to the Schedule configuration audit command and select it by


pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The Schedule Configuration Data Audit dialogue appears, displaying the
previously entered settings.
FW00353A

Schedule Configuration Data Audit

( ) minute
Run every: > 1 ( )
(♦)
hour(s)
day(s)
4
(hh:mm mm/dd/yyy)
Starting: > 06:30 05/02/1995<<

[ Default ]

[OK ♦ Return ] [Cancel ♦ Del ]

If you want to Then go to


enter the default settings step 8
(every day, starting at 6:30 a.m.)
enter a non-default frequency, time, or date step 9

8 Tab to the Default button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Fields in the dialogue are set to conduct an audit once a day, at 6:30 a.m.,
starting today. If the current time is past 6:30 a.m., the audit start date is set
to tomorrow's date.
Go to step 15.
9 To change the frequency of the audit, tab to the Run every field and enter how
often you want the audit to be conducted. Valid values for this field differ,
according to which time button is selected:
If time selected button is Then enter
minute(s) 15–59
hour(s) 1–23
day(s) 1–7

10 Tab to the time buttons and, using the arrow keys, move to the button you
want to select (that is, minutes, hours, or days).
11 Select the time button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The button is selected. The previous button is deselected.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-20 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-4
Scheduling an audit of configuration data (continued)

Step Action

12 Tab to the Next run field and enter the hours and minutes in the time field.
Remember to enter a colon (:) between the hours and minutes.
13 Tab to the date field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
14 Select today, or move to tomorrow and select it, by pressing Space (or
Keypad 0).
15 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Schedule Configuration Data Audit dialogue is removed. The audit is
conducted according to the time, date, and frequency specified in the
dialogue.
16 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-21

Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC


Use this procedure to transfer all data from the primary OPC to the backup
OPC, including configuration data for all ADMs in the ring.

Configuration data is backed up in two ways:


• automatically, during the OPC data synchronization
• manually (that is, optionally)
— before the Configuration Manager closes
— using the following procedure

Therefore, the following procedure is likely to be performed only after you


have made some configuration changes, but want to leave the tool open.
4
Requirements
Prior to carrying out this procedure, you must:
• have saved the configuration changes to the primary OPC, using the Save
and send configuration button in the main window
• have a user ID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-22 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-5
Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the ring
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-23

Procedure 4-5
Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC (continued)

Step Action

5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring
Utilities
Rate: STM16
4
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad,).


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00695A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology:
1 Audit Ring
configuration Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1] 2 Schedule configuration audit...

Procedure: None selected. 3 Transfer data to backup OPC ♦J


Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.
4 Edit configuration name

5 Delete configuration
Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM
12 12 10 6 Help 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-24 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-5
Transferring configuration data to the backup OPC (continued)

Step Action

7 Move to the Transfer data to backup OPC command and select it by


pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00703A

Transferring data to the backup OPC will cause any


existing data on the backup OPC to be overwritten.

Do you wish to continue?


[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

8 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. Another dialogue is displayed,
showing the results of the transfer.
FW00704A

Information Your request to transfer configuration data to the


backup OPC has been initiated.
Please check the Event Browser logs for the
results of the transfer.
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

9 Select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed. The main window remains open.
10 Continue with other procedures you want to perform using the Configuration
Manager.
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-25

Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM


Use this procedure to edit the automatic protection-switching (APS) ID for an
ADM in a ring configuration.

The APS ID is a unique node identifier for each ADM in a ring. Since a ring
can contain up to 16 nodes, these identifiers range from 0 to 15. The APS ID
is used by the OPC to manage protection-switching activities.

Each ring ADM must have a unique APS ID. IDs that are already assigned in
the ring are disabled and cannot be selected again.

Note 1: During this procedure, only the buttons and commands you need
to edit the APS ID are available. All other buttons and commands are
disabled until you complete the procedure. To abandon this procedure
before the configuration data has been saved, use the Revert command in 4
the list item menu.
Note 2: This procedure might affect traffic if it is performed while a
protection switch is active.
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-26 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the ring
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-27

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. The Configuration Manager: Ring is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring
Utilities
Rate: STM16
4
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6 Tab to the Configured Ring ADM list and move to the ring ADM you want to
edit.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-28 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

7 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW00236A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring Rate: STM16
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G1 1Neighbor


Details ADM
12 12 10 11 2 Edit... >>
10 10 12 11 3 Delete
11 11 12 10
4 Retrieve Transport Info

5 Audit
6 Send
7 Info on last command

8 Select
9 Deselect
10 Sort list >>
2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]
11 Help ♦H
3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

8 Move to the Edit command.


A cascade menu appears, displaying the options: APS ID and Configuration.
9 Using the right arrow key, move to the APS ID command and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The following Warning dialogue is displayed.
FW01246A

Warning
This command will be service affecting if there is a
protection switch active.

[ OK♦Return ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-29

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

10 Select the OK button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The Edit Ring ADM APS ID dialogue is displayed. All fields are disabled
except the Ring ADM APS ID field.
FW00352A

Edit Ring ADM APS ID:

Network Element: 12

Ring ADM APS ID: > 12 < 4


This ADM’s STM16 CPG G1 fibers connect to neighbor
ADM: 10 STM16 CPG: G1

This ADM’s STM16 CPG G2 fibers connect to neighbor


ADM: 11 STM16 CPG: G1

[ OK ♦Return ] [ Cancel ♦Del ]

11 With the Ring ADM APS ID field selected, display the chooser menu by
pressing Ctrl_L / (or Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, shohwing all APS IDs for the ring. IDs that
are already selected have a disable icon beside them.
12 Move to the new ID and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
13 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Edit Ring ADM APS ID dialogue disappears. The APS ID is revised in the
main window.
14 Repeat steps 2–13 for each APS ID to be edited.
15 Select the Save and send configuration data button by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The following confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00232A

You are about to:


1. Save the configuration data to the OPC database.
2. Send the configuration data to the ring ADMs.

Do you wish to continue?


[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-30 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

16 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The following dialogue appears, displaying the results of the operation.
FW00233A

Information The configuration data was saved to the OPC


database and sent to the ring ADMs successfully.

[ DDone ♦Return ]

17 Select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed.
18 To save the revised configuration data to the backup OPC, display the Utilities
menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad,).
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00695A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring Utilities


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology:
1 Audit Ring
configuration Rate: STM16

=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1] 2 Schedule configuration audit...

Procedure: None selected. 3 Transfer data to backup OPC ♦J


Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.
4 Edit configuration name

5 Delete configuration
Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM
12 12 10 6 Help 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-31

Procedure 4-6
Edit the APS ID for a ring ADM (continued)

Step Action

19 Move to the Transfer data to backup OPC command and select it by


pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The following confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00703A

Transferring data to the backup OPC will cause


any existing data on the backup OPC to be
overwritten.

Do you wish to proceed with the data transfer?


4
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ NDo ♦- ]

20 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The following dialogue is displayed, showing the results of the save operation.
FW00707A

Information The data transfer to the backup OPC


was initiated successfully.

[ DDone ♦Return ]

21 Select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).


The dialogue is removed.
22 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-32 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Editing the ring name


Use this procedure to change the name of an existing ring.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a user ID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
Procedure 4-7
Editing the ring name

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Configuration Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
The Configuration Manager main window is displayed, showing the ring
configurations.
FW00227A

> . Configuration Manager Create

Configurations sorted by name.

Name Type Topology Rate

Ring 1 TransportNode Fiber Ring STM16

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlt 0 11:40

2 Move to the ring you want to display and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The ring is highlighted.
3 Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
4 Select the Edit Configuration command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-33

Procedure 4-7
Editing the ring name (continued)

Step Action

5 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. The Configuration Manager is
displayed, showing all ADMs in the ring. Above the Configured Ring ADM list,
the Configured ADMs field identifies the starting ring ADM and direction
around the ring.
FW00228A

> . Configuration Manager: Ring


Name: Ring 1 Type: TransportNode Fiber Topology: Ring
Utilities
Rate: STM16
4
=>1 [Configure a ring ADM ...♦ 1]
Procedure: None selected.
Configured ADMS: Valid ring sorted 12. G1 in ring order.

Configured Ring ADM APS ID G1 Neighbor ADM G2 Neighbor ADM


12 12 10 11
10 10 12 11
11 11 12 10

2 [ Provision pass-through connections (added ADM(s) only ♦2]


3 [ Save and send configuration data ♦ 3]
C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 11:40

6 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad ,).


The Utilities menu is displayed.
7 Move to the Edit Configuration Name command and select by pressing
Space (or Keypad 0).
The Edit Configuration dialogue is displayed.
FW00708A

Edit Configuration

Name: > Ring 1


Type: TransportNode Fiber
Topology: Ring

Rate: STM16

[ OK ♦Return ] [Cancel ♦Del ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-34 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Procedure 4-7
Editing the ring name (continued)

Step Action

8 In the Name field, backspace over the existing ring name and enter a new
name. You can enter up to 20 characters.
9 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00709A

The data, as entered, will be saved.

Do you wish to return?

[ Yes ♦Return ] N ♦- ]
[ No

10 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl _A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue is removed. A progress dialogue is displayed,
indicating that the ring name is being changed. When the change is complete,
the Edit Configuration dialogue is removed and the new ring name is
displayed at the top of the Configuration Manager: Ring window.
11 To close the Configuration Manager: Ring window, display the window menu
by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
12 Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The Configuration Manager: Ring window is closed. The Configuration
Manager main window is displayed. A progress dialogue is displayed,
indicating that the list is being updated with the new ring name.
13 Close the Configuration Manager main window.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Configuring the TN-16X ring 4-35

Displaying the node map for a ring ADM node (through the command
input area of the network element user interface)
Use this procedure to display the node map for an add-drop multiplexer
(ADM) node in a ring. The nodemap command is entered through the
command input area of the network element user interface.

A node map is a list of all the ADM nodes in the ring, with the node from
which the command was issued listed first, then proceeding clockwise around
the ring. This order reflects the direction of transmission from the G1 STM-16
circuit pack group. The G2 node map is automatically derived as the inverse
of the G1 node map. The G2 node map is not displayed by the nodemap
command.

Requirements
To perform this procedure:
4
• You must be familiar with the VT100-type network element user interface,
refer to Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 4-8
Displaying the node map for a ring ADM node (through the command input
area of the network element user interface)

Step Action

1 If necessary, log into the network element user interface.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
2 Enter the following commands:
quit all↵
nodemap ↵
Note: Entering quit all leaves the MAPCI environment. The nodemap
command should not be entered in the MAPCI environment.
A report is displayed showing the node map for the G1 STM-16 circuit pack
group. See Figure 4-1 for a sample of the report.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


4-36 Configuring the TN-16X ring

Figure 4-1
Sample of nodemap command output
FW00710A

>nodemap
NE ID APS ID
----- ------
8534 14
8535 15
8554 4
8555 5
8556 6
8557 7
8559 9
8560 0

>

end of chapter

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


5-1

Setting up tributary connections using


the OPC 5-
This chapter contains procedures for setting up 140M, STM-1e, STM-1o, and
STM-4o connections for linear and ring configurations. The same procedures
can be used for either configuration. The procedures in this chapter address
adding, deleting, and modifying connections, displaying and modifying
connection lists, and auditing connections. Most procedures use the
operations controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool. However, STM-1e,
STM-1o, and STM-4o connections at a given add-drop multiplexer (ADM) 5
node can be displayed through the command input (CI) area of the network
element user interface and this procedure is included in this chapter. Setting
up procedures for 34M connections are detailed in Chapter 6.

Definitions: connection and configuration


The following definitions are required in order to understand the concepts and
accurately carry-out the procedures in this chapter.

Definitions: connection
In this chapter, the term “connection” is used very specifically to mean a link
established between a tributary circuit at one network element and a tributary
circuit at another network element via an STM-16 channel (or channels)
between two network elements. Both network elements must be in the same
configuration.

For example, Figure 5-1 shows a ring configuration where tributary K at


network element N1 is connected to tributary L at network element N3 via the
STM-16 channels between N1 and N3.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-2 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Figure 5-1
A connection in a ring configuration
FW00711A

Tributary K

N1 N2

Legend
Tributary
N6 Ring optics

N5 N4 N3 Tributary L

Note 1: In the figure, “Ring optics” refers to the two STM-16 channels that
connect all network elements in the ring. Each channel is composed of two
optical fibres, one for transmitting and one for receiving. Hence, the
channels are bidirectional. One channel transmits in one direction around
the ring, and the other transmits in the opposite direction.
Definition: configuration
In this chapter, the term “configuration” is used very specifically to mean the
groupings of network elements formed when the OPC Configuration
Manager tool is used to define a configuration.

There are two types of configurations: linear and ring. Figure 5-1 illustrates a
ring configuration. Ring configurations use network elements configured as
add-drop multiplexers (ADMs). A linear configuration consists of a
point-to-point connection between two network elements. Linear
configurations use network elements configured as terminals.

Table 5-1 summarizes the STM-16 architectures supported by the


Configuration Manager tool.

A configuration is distinguished by the fact that all network elements in the


configuration are connected together with the same STM-16 channel(s). In
terms of the physical installation, this means that the STM-16 optical
interface(s) at each network element are connected to the STM-16 optical
interface(s) at the other network element(s) in the configuration.

In Figure 5-1, each architecture represents one configuration except 1:N. In


the 1:N case, the STM-16 channels are not connected to every network
element. Each channel in the 1:N configuration is only connected to two
network elements, one at one site and one at the other site. Hence, a separate
configuration must be defined for each channel.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-3

In the other architectures, even though there may be more than one STM-16
channel, all channels are connected to each network element in the
architecture.
Table 5-1
STM-16 architectures supported by the Configuration Manager tool

Architecture Configuration Network Number of Protection


element STM-16 channels
type

MS SPRing ring ADM Two, transmitting in Working timeslots 1 to 8 for


opposite directions both channels. Timeslots 9 to
16 on one channel protect the
working timeslots on the other
channel

1:N linear: one for terminal N+1, ‘N’ working One protection channel for N
(multipoint-to-
multipoint)
each channel channels and 1
protection channel.
working channels.
N=1 is not the same as1:1
5
Each channel is on because N=1 uses a separate
a separate shelf shelf for the protection
channel

ADM: add-drop multiplexer terminal: used as short form for line terminating equipment (LTE)

For more detailed descriptive information, refer to System Description, 323-1211-100.

Connection Manager tool


The main purpose of the Connection Manager tool is to provision STM-1e,
34M, STM-1o, or STM-4o connections in an OPC span of control. For a
detailed description of the tool, refer to User Interface Description,
323-1211-301. By default, the Connection Manager tool is found in the
Network Admin and Network Surveillance toolsets of the OPC user interface.

The main window of the tool lists all connections that have been set up, for all
configurations in the OPC span of control.

The tool allows you to do the following:


• provision 140M, STM-1e, STM-1o, or STM-4o connections
• display all connections in the ring, including any connections that
terminate in another OPC span of control
• filter the connection list to show only the connections you are interested in,
for example, only connections in a specified configuration
• view any STM-1 channels in use between two NEs
• view facilities in use at an NE

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-4 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

• audit the connection data at specified NEs


• modify a connection.

Provisioning connections
The Connection Manager tool requires you to define each connection
individually and the definition is confined to configuration boundaries. Hence,
even when the end-to-end path bridges several configurations or multiple
OPC spans of control are involved, the complexity always reduces to a series
of connections provisioned one-by-one in each configuration. The following
examples are provided to demonstrate this point in a number of situations.
Figure 5-2
Same configuration, same span of control
FW00711A

Tributary K

N1 N2

Legend
Tributary
N6 Ring optics

N5 N4 N3 Tributary L

Note: In the figure, ‘Ring optics” refers to the two STM-16 channels that
connect all network elements in the ring.

Defining a connection in the same span of control and the same


configuration
A connection between two network elements in the same configuration is
completely defined by specifying:
• the two network elements at either end of the connection within a specific
configuration (in Figure 5-2, this is N1 and N3)
• the tributaries (see Note 1).
• the timeslot(s) used by the connection (that is, the STM-1 channel(s) on the
STM-16 channel). (See Note 2).
• the connection rate
• the route (see Note 3).

Note 1: The tributaries are the facilities (connection points and circuit
packs) at the end network elements that provide the service access points
for the traffic entering/leaving the configuration. These network elements
are ADMs in ring configurations and terminals (LTEs) in linear

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-5

configurations. (In Figure 5-2, K and L are the tributaries. However, the
information required to define the connection is the type of tributary
(STM-1e, STM-1o, STM-4o or 140M), the circuit pack group (CPG), and
the port number on the shelf that serves the tributary. Note that “port”
refers to ports on tributaries).
Note 2: In ring configurations, the timeslot(s) are retained by the system
for all pass–through ADMs. For example, in Figure 5-2, for the connection
between K at N1 and L at N3, N2 is a pass–through ADM along one route,
N4, N5, and N6 are pass–through ADMs along the other route. If a timeslot
is inadvertently used at one of the pass–through ADMs before the K–to–L
connection is defined, then the K–to–L connection is rejected by the
system.
Note 3: The route is specified for ring configurations only. The choices are
Long or Short, with the “length” determined by the number of
pass–through ADMs. For example, in Figure 5-2, for the connection
between K at N1 and L at N3, the route through N2 is the short route, the
route through N4, N5, and N6 is the long route. Timeslot(s) are only
reserved along the specified route. (The other route becomes the protection
loop and the timeslots are automatically reserved since all working 5
timeslots (1 to 8) are protected by the protection timeslots (9 to 16) on the
other STM-16 channel.)
Defining a connection across more than one span of control
Situations can arise where one configuration comes under the span of control
of more than one OPC. For example, as a network evolves, the number of
network elements in a given configuration can grow. However, there is a
maximum number of network elements that can be managed by one OPC. If
the OPC was at capacity when the configuration was created, then another
OPC must be provisioned to manage the new network elements.

When there is more than one OPC span of control for a configuration, a
configuration must be defined in each span of control. Both configurations
must include all network elements in the configuration. As well, every
connection must be defined in both spans of control, even if both end network
elements and all pass-through network elements are in the other span of
control. For example, referring to Figure 5-3, the steps required to connect
Tributary K to Tributary L are:

Commission and test all network elements and tributaries (as described in
Commissioning Procedures, 323-1211-220). (Note that the OPC span of
control is defined on a network element-by-network element basis when the
commissioning data for each network element is entered.)

Create a ring configuration at OPC1 that includes all the network elements
(N2, N3, and N4, as well as N1, N5, and N6). Note that as this configuration
is defined, the system notifies you that N2, N3, and N4 are not in the span of
control of this OPC. (Creating linear and ring configurations are both
described in Commissioning Procedures, 323-1211-220).

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-6 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Create a ring configuration at OPC2 that includes all the network elements.
As this configuration is defined, the system notifies you that N1, N5, and N6
are not in the span of control of this OPC.

Specify the connection in the same way as described above under “Defining a
connection in the same span of control and the same configuration”. The only
difference occurs when you are actually carrying out the procedure using the
Connection Manager tool: in the network element chooser menu, the network
elements in another span of control are shaded differently.

The connection must be defined in both spans of control.


Figure 5-3
One configuration, two spans of control
FW00713A

Tributary K

N1 N2

OPC1 OPC2
span of N6 span of
control control

Legend
N5 N4 N3 Tributary
Tributary L
Ring optics

Note 1: In the figure, “Ring optics” refers to the two STM-16 channels that
connect all network elements in the ring.
Note 2: It is recommended that the same configuration name be used in
both spans of control.
Note 3: It is recommended that the optional Connection ID be used for
connections that cross more than one span of control. This facilitates
tracing a connection. It is also recommended that you give the connection
the same ID in every configuration, and compose the ID from the IDs or
names of network elements at the end points of the connection.
Tributaries
The STM-16 network element supports bidirectional STM-4o, STM-1o,
STM-1e, 34M, 140M tributaries. In any linear or ring configuration, the
tributary type at either end of the STM-16 channel can be different

Tributaries that connect a network element in one configuration to a network


element in another configuration must be of the same rate and type.

For the current TN16X release, the tributary circuits at each network element
can be all STM-4o, all STM-1o, all STM-1e, all 140M, all 34M, or any

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-7

combination of these tributaries (note that STM-4o tributaries may not be


mixed with other types within a single quadrant). The procedures for setting
up connections in this chapter are similar for STM-4o, STM-1o, STM-1e and
140M tributaries.

Connection types
The STM-16 network element supports STM-1 connections over the STM-16
channel. For a ring configuration, STM connections can be set up on the 8
working timeslots on both STM-16 channels (for a total of 16 working
STM-1 timeslots). For a linear configuration, STM connections can be set up
for all 16 timeslots. An STM connection retains the same timeslot(s) through
all pass-through ADMs.

Timeslot assignment
The mapping of STM-1 timeslots to the tributary facilities is not fixed. That
is, the Connection Manager allows variable timeslot assignment (TSA). This
allows you to assign any working timeslot to any tributary facility.

Restrictions and limitations 5


This section summarizes restrictions and limitations to consider when
provisioning linear and ring connections.
• The Connection Manager cannot be opened unless a configuration has
been defined for the system. For more information, see Commissioning
and Site Testing Procedures, 323-1211-220.
• While the Connection Manager is open, you can open the Configuration
Manager, but not the Configuration Manager:Ring or the Configuration
Manager:Linear. This ensures that configuration data does not change
while connections are being set up. Similarly, you can open the Connection
Manager when the Configuration Manager is open but not when the
Configuration Manager: Ring or the Configuration Manager: Linear is
open.
• The Connection Manager identifies the facilities that are currently
provisioned for connections. It does not identify the state of the facilities
(IS or OOS).
• The OPC Connection Manager tool treats configurations individually and
only verifies connections within the same configuration. This means that
connection inconsistencies between configurations are not identified. The
planner and provisioner are responsible for ensuring that tributaries
between configurations use the same tributary type and rate at both ends of
the link. This is true whether the configurations are in the same OPC span
of control or in different OPC spans of control.
• Connection data is synchronized between OPCs in one direction only, from
the primary OPC to its backup. Therefore, if you make connection changes
on an active backup OPC, you must repeat these changes on the primary
OPC when the primary becomes active again. Also, if the ring contains
NEs in another OPC span of control, you must make all connection
changes at each primary OPC individually.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-8 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

• For STM connections to carry traffic, the appropriate tributary equipment


and facilities must be installed and provisioned at each end network
element. Tributary facilities can be provisioned and placed in service either
before or after STM connections are set up.
• If tributary facilities are provisioned and put into service before
connections are set up, no alarms are generated. If connections are set up
before tributary facilities are provisioned, no alarms are generated until the
tributary facilities are provisioned. If both connections and tributary
facilities are provisioned, but not yet carrying traffic, “Loss of signal”
(LOS) and “Alarm indication signal” (AIS) alarms are generated.
• You can edit the STM-1 channel in service but there will be a service loss
of approximately 60 ms when the changes are committed. To prevent
service loss, the tributary facilities must first be placed out of service
(OOS).
• You can modify the connection ID while the equipment is in service (IS).

Chapter task list


The following tasks are included in this chapter. The task ‘Add a connection’
is a prerequisite for all other tasks in the list. After connections have been set
up, other tasks can be performed at any time and in any order.

Table 5-2

Task Page

Displaying connections in the ring page 5-9


Modifying the list of connections page 5-16
Adding a connection page 5-22
Editing a connection page 5-35
Deleting a connection page 5-44
Scheduling an audit of connection data page 5-48
Adding a connection page 5-22
Performing a manual backup of connection data page 5-57
Displaying the connection map for an ADM node (from the page 5-61
network element user interface)

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-9

Displaying connections in the ring


Use this procedure to display information for connections in the ring. Using
this procedure, you can display the following information:
• a summary of all connections that were provisioned using the operations
controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool
• details for an individual connection, including the end and pass-through
network elements, the tributary facilities, and the channel that the
connection has been assigned to
• STM-1 channels between specified network elements (both available and
in use)
• tributary facilities at a specified network element (both available and in
use)
Note 1: Only the connections that were provisioned using the operations
controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool are displayed.
Note 2: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection. 5
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
described in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended. The warning does not
apply to this procedure.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-10 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

2 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Connection Manager main window is displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 In the Connection list, move to a connection that you want to detail and
display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW01234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 1 14 STM1e G16 4


12 STM1e G3 3 12 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e 1G5 1 13
Details... STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 1 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e 2G1 Edit...
1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e 3G1 Delete
2 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e STM1e G7
4G1 3
Show 13
primary gateway selectors... 3
5 VC-3 Path Trace provisioning
6 VC-3 Path Trace retrieval
7 Select
8 Deselect
9 Help ♦H

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-11

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

4 Select the Details command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).


The Details dialogue is displayed.
FW00716A

Details
Configuration: pa
Connection ID: 1

Connection Termination A:
End NE A: 1 Route: Short (1 hop)
Tributary: STM1e G2
Slot: 3 NEs in Route Optic
Connection Termination Z: 1 G1
3 G1
End NE Z: 3
Tributary: STM1e G1
Slot: 2
5
STM-1 Channel: 1
Connection Rate: STM-1 [ D
Done ♦Return]

5 To close the Details dialogue, select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The Details dialogue closes
If you want to Then go to
display the available STM-1 channels between step 6
two network elements
display the available facilities at a network step 14
element
close the tool step 21

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-12 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

6 In the main window, display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press
Shift +.
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
EndSchedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

7 Select the Show STM-1 channel usage command by pressing Space (or
Keypad 0).
The Channel Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00355B

STM-1 Channel Usage

Configuration: > Ring1 <

End NE A: > < End NE Z: > <

Route: (♦) Short


( ) Long

STM-1 Usage

[Done ♦Return]

If the configuration is Then go to


correct step 10
not correct step 8

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-13

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

8 In the configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/(or


Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you.
9 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0)
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
10 In the End NE A field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the network elements available to
you.
11 Move to one of the NEs that terminates the STM-1 channel and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The network element ID is displayed in the field.
5
12 Tab to the End NE Z field and repeat steps 10 and 11 for the second end NE.
The network element ID is displayed in the field. The STM-1 channels
between the two network elements are shown in the Usage list.
FW00702B

STM-1 Channel Usage

Configuration: > Ring1 <

End NE A: > 1 < End NE Z: > 3 <

Route: (♦) Short (G2) - 75% (6 Channels) available


( ) Long (G1) - 75% (6 Channels) available

STM-1 Usage
1 Not Available
2 Not Available
3 Available
4 Available
5 Available
6 Available
7 Available
8 Available

[Done ♦Return]

13 To close the dialogue, tab to the Done button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A
(or Keypad 0).
The Channel Usage dialogue closes.
If you want to Then go to
display the available tributary facilities at a step 14
network element
close the tool step 21

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-14 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

14 In the main window, display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press
Shift +.
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

15 Move to the Show tributary usage command and select it by pressing Space
(or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00356A

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > Third <

NE : > <

Slot Tributary Usage

[ Done ♦Return ]

16 In the Configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-15

Procedure 5-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

17 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
18 Tab to the NE field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the network elements available to
you.
19 Move to the network element that you want to display and select it by pressing
Space (or Keypad 0).
The network element ID is displayed in the field. All tributary facilities for the
selected network element are shown in the Tributary list.
FW00356B

Tributary Usage 5
Configuration: > Third <

NE : > 13 <

Slot Tributary Usage


2 STM1e G1 Available
3 STM1e G2 Available
4 STM1e G3 Available
5 STM1e G4 Available

[ Done ♦Return ]

20 To close the Tributary Usage dialogue, tab to the OK button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue closes.
21 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-16 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Modifying the list of connections


Use this procedure to modify the Connection list in the main window. For
example, you can list only those connections within a specified configuration.

This procedure allows you to filter the connections list by doing one of the
following:
• excluding or including specified connections
• excluding or including connection changes that have occurred since the
tool was opened
• a combination of both

The filter settings are not saved when the tool is closed.

Connections are displayed in the main window as long as one end NE for the
connection displays the word ‘Included’ in the filter list. To remove a
connection from the main window, both end NEs must display ‘Not included’
in the filter list.

This procedure describes how to filter the list using the Filter command in the
Utilities menu. A second filter command in the connection list menu performs
the same function.

Note 1: Only the connections that were provisioned using the operations
controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool are displayed.
Note 2: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-17

Procedure 5-2
Modifying the list of connections

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended. The warning does not
apply to this procedure.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

5
2 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad0).
The Connection Manager main window is displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 You may sort and filter connections or close the tool.

If you want to Then go to


filter connections from the list step 8
sort the connections in the list (by connection ID, step 4
end network element or STM-1 channel)
close the tool step 18

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-18 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-2
Modifying the list of connections (continued)

Step Action

4 Display the View menu by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad ,).


The View menu is displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A 1 Filter ...


Showing: All connections 2 sort >>

3 Help
Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

5 Move to the Sort command, using the arrow keys, to sort items in the
Connection list.
A cascade menu is displayed, showing the sort options.
6 Move to the sort option you want and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad
0).
Connections in the list are sorted according to the selected option and the
View menu closes.
7 You may filter the sorted connections or close the tool.
If you want to Then go to
filter connections step 8
from the list
close the tool step 18

8 Display the View menu again by pressing Ctrl_L T (or Keypad ,).
The View menu is displayed.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-19

Procedure 5-2
Modifying the list of connections (continued)

Step Action

9 Select the Filter command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).


The Filter dialogue is displayed. By default, all network elements in the OPC
span of control are included in the filter.
FW00718A

Filter

Show connections terminating at:

Configuration Network Element


TN-16X01 12 Included
13 Included
14 Included
15 Included

Show connections which meet the following criteria:


[ ] New or modified connections only

5
( ) STM and VC managed connections
( ) STM managed connections only
( ) VC managed connections only

[ OK ♦Return ] [ Apply ] [ Cancel ♦Del ]

10 Only a specific group of connections need to be displayed.


If you want to Then go to
exclude a connection from the main window step 11
display only certain connection types step 16

11 In the Network Element list, move to an end NE for the connection you want
to exclude and display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad
Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW00359A

Filter

Show connections terminating at:

Configuration Network Element


TN-16X01 12 Included
13 Included
11 14
Add >> Included
2 15Remove >> Included

3 Select >>
4 Deselect
Show connections which >>
meet the following criteria:
[ ] New or modified connections only
5 Help ♦H
( ) STM and VC managed connections
( ) STM managed connections only
( ) VC managed connections only

[ OK ♦Return ] [ Apply ] [ Cancel ♦Del ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-20 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-2
Modifying the list of connections (continued)

Step Action

12 Move to the Remove command, and using the right arrow key move to the
cascade menu. Select either This NE or This Configuration by pressing
Space (or Keypad 0).
If you selected This NE, the word ‘Included’ changes to ‘Not included’ for the
selected NE. If you selected This Configuration, the word ‘Included’
changes to ‘Not included’ for all network elements in the configuration.
13 Move to the other end NE for the connection you want to exclude and repeat
steps 11 and 12.
14 You may display, apply, confirm, and revise connections as follows:

If you want to Then go to


to apply the revisions to the Connection list without step 15
closing the Filter dialogue
display only new or modified connections step 16
revise the Connection list and close the Filter step 17
dialogue
15 To apply the revisions to the Connection list without closing the Filter
dialogue:
a. Tab to the Apply button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The connections in the main window are revised according to
the options specified in the Filter dialogue. The Filter dialogue
remains open.
b. To confirm the revisions in the main window, display the main window
by pressing Ctrl_W +.
The main window appears, displaying the revised Connection
list.
c. Display the Filter dialogue again by pressing +.
d. Go to step 14.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-21

Procedure 5-2
Modifying the list of connections (continued)

Step Action

16 To display only new or modified connections:


a. Tab to the New or modified connections only button and select it
by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The button is selected.
b. Tab to the Apply button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The connections in the main window are revised according to the
options specified in the Filter dialogue. The Filter dialogue remains
open.
c. To confirm the changes in the main window, display the main window
by pressing Ctrl_W +.
The main window appears, displaying the revised Connection list.

17
d. Display the Filter dialogue again by pressing +.
You can also select one of the connection types as follows:
5
Tab to the STM and VC managed connections only button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
This will show all connection types.
or
Tab to the STM managed connections only button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
This will show only STM connection types.
or
Tab to the VC managed connections only button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
This will show only VC connection types.
When you have chosen a connection type, tab to the Apply button and select
it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The connections in the main window are revised according to the options
specified in the Filter dialogue. The Filter dialogue remains open.
To confirm the changes in the main window, display the main window by
pressing Ctrl_W +.
The main window appears, displaying the revised Connection list.
Display the Filter dialogue again by pressing +.
18 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Filter dialogue closes. The connections in the main window are revised
according to the options in the dialogue.
19 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-22 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Adding a connection
Use this procedure to add a logical connection to the connection data.

For the connection to carry traffic, the appropriate equipment must be


installed and tributary facilities must be provisioned and placed in service at
each end network element. (See Installation Procedures, 323-1211-201 to
install facilities and Provisioning and Operations Procedures, 323-1211-310
to provision facilities.) The following procedure can be done either before or
after the tributary facilities are provisioned.

Note: A connection can be added between two different circuit pack types.

This procedure includes steps for adding a connection to a mid-span-meet


configuration. A mid-span-meet configuration is a single configuration with
the following characteristics:
• It contains network elements in different operations controller (OPC)
spans of control
• It contains network elements that are optically connected to another
vendor’s equipment
• It has connections across a mixed network.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-23

Recording connection data


Figure 5-4 can be copied and used to record connection data.
Figure 5-4
Connection data table
FW00719A

Connection table
OPC:

Configuration:

Connection ID:

Connection Termination A

End NE A:

Tributary (Type, CPG & port*):

Connection Termination Z

End NE Z:
5
Tributary (Type, CPG & port*):

STM-1
STS-1 Channel:

Connection Rate:

Route:

* " Port" refers to ports on electrical tributaries and channels on optical tributaries

Connections across more than one span of control


It is recommended that the optional Connection ID be used for connections
that cross more than one span of control. This facilitates tracing a connection.
It is also recommended that you give the connection the same ID in every
configuration, and compose the ID from the IDs or names of the network
elements at the end points of the connection.

For example, a connection that starts at the network element N1 and ends at
the network element N3, could be given the connection ID in all
configurations of N1::N3.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• ensure that the Configuration Manager:Linear or the Configuration
Manager:Ring tool is closed
• obtain the following configuration information:

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-24 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

— an ID for the new connection


— the end network element IDs in the connection
— the tributary facilities (that is, the type, group number, and port/channel
number for both end NEs in the connection)
— the channel(s) that you want to assign to the connection
— direction around the ring (for ring configurations only)

• prepare a map of the nodes and connections you want to set up; this is
especially helpful if you are setting up connections across multiple
configurations or more than one span of control
• read the command conventions for this type of user interface in Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.
Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-25

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

5
[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

If you Then go to
know which channel you want to assign step 13
do not know which channel you want to assign step 2

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-26 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

2 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Select the Show STM-1 channel usage command by pressing Space (or
Keypad 0).
The Channel Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00355B

STM-1 Channel Usage

Configuration: > Ring1 <

End NE A: > < End NE Z: > <

Route: (♦) Short


( ) Long

STM-1 Usage

[Done ♦Return]

If the configuration name is Then


correct step 6
not correct step 4

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-27

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

4 In the Configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you.
5 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad)
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
6 Tab to the End NE A field, if necessary.
7 Display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the network elements in the
configuration.
8 Move to one of the end network elements that terminates the new connection
and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The network element ID is displayed in the field.
5
9 Tab to the End NE Z field and repeat steps 7 and 8 for the other end network
element.
The network element ID appears in the field. The STM-1 channels between
the two network elements are shown in the STM-1 Channel list.
FW00702B

STM-1 Channel Usage

Configuration: > Ring1 <

End NE A: > 1 < End NE Z: > 3 <

Route: (♦) Short (G2) - 75% (6 Channels) available


( ) Long (G1) - 75% (6 Channels) available

STM-1 Usage
1 Not Available
2 Not Available
3 Available
4 Available
5 Available
6 Available
7 Available
8 Available

[Done ♦Return]

10 For a connection, locate an available STM-1 channel and write the channel
number down. You will need this number later in this procedure.
Note: Connections can be set up for all 16 (1-16) channels (that is, timeslots)
as extra traffic for a linear configuration.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-28 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

11 To close the STM-1 Channel Usage dialogue, tab to the Done button and
select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The STM-1 Channel Usage dialogue closes.
12 Choose the tributary for the connection.
If you Then go to
know which tributary facilities you want to assign step 22
do not know which tributary facilities you want to assign step 13

13 To display tributary facility information, display the Utilities menu again by


pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 45M
Transfer data 4toG16 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-29

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

14 Move to the Show tributary usage command and select it by pressing Space
(or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00356A

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > Third <

NE : > <

Slot Tributary Usage

5
[ Done ♦Return ]

If Then
correct step 17
not correct step 15

15 In the Configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed , listing the configurations that are available
to you.
16 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
17 Tab to the NE field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the network elements in the
configuration.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-30 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

18 Move to an end network element in the connection and select it by pressing


Space (or Keypad 0).
The network element ID is displayed in the field. All tributary facilities for the
selected network element are shown in the Tributary list.
FW00356B

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > Third <

NE : > 13 <

Slot Tributary Usage


2 STM1e G1 Available
3 STM1e G2 Available
4 STM1e G3 Available
5 STM1e G4 Available

[ Done ♦Return ]

19 Locate an available tributary facility and write down the type, group number
and port/channel number. You will need this information later in this
procedure.
20 Repeat steps 17 to 19 for the second end network element in the connection.
21 To close the Tributary Usage dialogue, tab to the DONE button and select it
by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue closes.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-31

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

22 In the main window, tab to the Add button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The Add Connection dialogue is displayed. The name of the first configuration
created is displayed in the Configuration field by default.
FW00720A

Add Connection
Configuration : > Ring 1 <
f
Connection ID:
f

Connection Termination A:
End NE A: > < Route: (♦) Short
f
Tributary: > ( ) Long
Slot:
NEs in Route Optic
Connection Termination Z:
End NE Z: >
Tributary: >
Slot:
<
f
5
STM-1 Channel: >
Connection Rate: > STM-1

[OK ♦Return] [Cancel ♦Del]

If the configuration name is Then go to


correct step 25
not correct step 23

23 In the Configuration field, display chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or


Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you.
24 Using the down arrow key, move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
25 Tab to the Connection ID field, enter a unique name for the connection. You
can enter up to 40 characters in the field.
The ID is optional. If you do not fill in this field, the connection is listed in the
main window, but without an identifier.
Note: For mid-span-meet connections, it is recommended that you name the
connection as follows:
End NEID::Other end NEID
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-32 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

26 Tab to the End NE A field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L /
(or Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed.
27 From the chooser menu, move to one of the end network elements for the
connection and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The network element ID is displayed in the field.
28 Tab to the Tributary field and enter the tributary facility information you wrote
down in step 19 by typing:
<service type> <circuit pack group> <port no.>↵

where
<service type> is 140m, stm1e, stm1o, or stm4
<circuit pack is g1 to g16 for 140M, STM-1e or STM-1o
group> is g1 to g8 for STM-4o
<port no.> is 1 to 4 for STM-4o

29 Tab to the End NE Z field.


The associated slot number for the End NE A tributary facility is displayed in
the Slot field.
30 Display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3).
31 Repeat steps 27 to 28 for the other end network element in the connection.
Note: Connections are provisioned on a configuration-by-configuration basis.
This means that the “other end network element” refers to the other end in the
same configuration. This is obvious when the connection is between two
network elements in the same configuration but may not be as obvious when
the connection spans several configurations.
32 Tab to the Channel field.
For ring configurations, the end network elements and the pass-through
network elements in the Short route are displayed in the Route list. The Route
and Route list are not applicable to linear configurations.
33 Enter the channel number that you wrote down in step 10.
34 Proceed according to the configuration:
If this is Then go to
a linear configuration step 39
a ring configuration step 35

Note: The Route section only applies to ring configurations.


—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-33

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

35 Tab to the Route button. The Short route is selected.


If you want to specify the Then go to
long route step 36
short route step 37

36 To specify the long route move to the Long button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Short button is deselected. The Long button is selected. The end
network elements, the optical circuit pack group (CPG) at the end network
elements, and the pass-through network elements in the long route are
displayed in the Route list.
37 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Add Connection dialogue closes. A confirmation dialogue is displayed if
the connection data are correct. If there are errors in the data, an error dialog 5
appears and Xs are placed beside the fields where the errors occurred.
Correct these fields and select the OK button again.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful.


You are about to add this connection

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

38 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The new connection is listed in the main
window.

If the connection Then


spans two or more configurations in the same You must add the
OPC span of control connection information
to each configuration.
Repeat steps 21 to 38
is contained within a single configuration in the step 39
same span of control

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-34 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-3
Adding a connection (continued)

Step Action

39 To close the tool:


a. Display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 8


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 7
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 4
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

b. Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


A confirmation dialogue is displayed, prompting you to transfer any
connection changes to the backup OPC.
FW00723A

Changes have been made to the connection data.

Do you wish to transfer these changes to the Backup


OPC before closing the tool?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ] [ CCancel ♦ Del ]

c. Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The connection changes are
transferred to the backup OPC. The tool is closed.
40 If the configuration contains network elements in other OPC spans of control,
repeat steps 1 to 39 for the remaining OPCs.
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-35

Editing a connection
Use this procedure to modify an existing connection.

If the ring contains NEs in other OPC spans of control, you must repeat this
procedure for all OPCs.

Editing the connection ID can be done in service. Editing any other


connection information cannot be done in service. When editing information
other than the ID, you must ensure that the facilities are out of service before
you perform the following procedure. See Provisioning and Operations
Procedures, 323-1211-310.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
5
Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-36 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

The Connection Manager main window appears. All connections in the ring
appear in the Connection list.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

If Then
know which channel you want to edit step 10
do not know which channel you want to edit step 2

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-37

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

2 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

5
[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Select the Show STM-1 channel usage command by pressing Space (or
Keypad 0).
The Channel Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00355B

STM-1 Channel Usage

Configuration: > Ring1 <

End NE A: > < End NE Z: > <

Route: (♦) Short


( ) Long

STM-1 Usage

[Done ♦Return]

4 In the End NE A field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the NEs in the ring.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-38 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

5 Move to one of the end NEs that terminates the revised connection and select
it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The NE ID is shown in the field.
6 Tab to the End NE Z field and repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other end NE.
The NE ID appears in the field. The STM-1 channels between the two NEs
appear in the STM-1 Channel list.
If you Then go to
want to change the route step 7
do not want to change the route step 8

7 To change the route:


a. Tab to the Short Route button
If you want Short Route Then go to
selected step b
not selected step c

b. Using the down arrow key, move to the Long button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Short button is deselected. The Long button is selected.
Go to step 8.
c. Select the Short button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Short button is selected. The Long button is deselected.

8 Locate an available STM-1 channel and write it down. You will need this
channel number later in this procedure.
9 To close the STM-1 Channel Usage dialogue, tab to the OK button and select
it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The STM-1 Channel Usage dialogue closes.
10
If you Then go to
do not want to change the facility step 20
know which facility you want to change step 20
do not know which facility you want to change step 11

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-39

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

11 To display facility information, display the Utilities menu again by pressing


Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2

5
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

12 Move to the Show tributary usage command and select it by pressing Space
(or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue is displayed.
FW00356A

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > Third <

NE : > <

Slot Tributary Usage

[ Done ♦Return ]

13 In the NE field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the NEs in the ring.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-40 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

14 Move to an end NE in the connection and select it by pressing Space (or


Keypad 0).
The NE ID is shown in the field. All facilities for the selected NE are shown in
the Tributary list.
15 Locate an available facility and write down the group number and
port/channel number. You will need this information later in this procedure.
16 If necessary, repeat steps 13 to 15 for the second end NE in the connection.
17 To close the Tributary Usage dialogue, tab to the OK button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Tributary Usage dialogue closes.
18 In the main window, move to the connection you want to edit and display the
list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW01234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 1 14 STM1e G16 4


12 STM1e G3 3 12 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e 1G5 1 13
Details... STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 1 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e 2G1 Edit...
1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e 3G1 Delete
2 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e STM1e G7
4G1 3
Show 13
primary gateway selectors... 3
5 VC-3 Path Trace provisioning
6 VC-3 Path Trace retrieval
7 Select
8 Deselect
9 Help ♦H

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-41

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

19 Move to the Edit command and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The Edit Connection dialogue is displayed.
FW00720B

Edit Connection

Configuration: Ring 1
Connection ID: fourth

Connection Termination A:
End NE A: > 12 < Route: ( ) Short
f
Tributary: > STM1e G2 (♦) Long (2 hops)
Slot: 36
NEs in Route Optic
Connection Termination Z: 12 G2
End NE A: > 13 <
f 13
Tributary: > STM1e G6 12 G1
Slot: 37

STM-1 Channel: > 7


Connection Rate: > STM-1 5
[OK ♦Return] [Cancel ♦Del]

20
If you want to Then go to
change the connection identifier step 21
change End NE A or End NE Z step 22
change a facility step 23
change the STM-1 channel step 24
change the route step 25
save the connection changes you have made in step 26
the dialogue

21 In the Connection ID field, enter a unique name for the connection.


Note: The ID is optional for a connection. If you do not fill in this field, the
connection is listed in the main window, but without an identifier.
Go to step 20.
22 To change End NE A or End NE Z:
a. Tab to the End NE A (or End NE Z) field and display the chooser menu
by pressing Ctrl_L / (or Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed.
b. From the chooser menu, move to a new end NE for the connection and
select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The NE ID is shown in the field.
c. Go to step 20.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-42 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

23 To change a facility:
a. Tab to the Tributary field and enter the card type and group number you
wrote down in step 15:
<card type> <CPG numbers>
where
<card type> is 140m, stm1e, stm1o, or stm4
<CPG numbers> is g1 to g16 for 140M, STM-1e or STM-1o
is g1 to g8 for STM-4o

The associated slot number appears in the Slot field when you tab to the next
field.
b. Go to step 20.
24 To change the channel:
a. Tab to the Channel field and enter the channel number you wrote down
in step 8. Valid values for this field are 1 through 8.
The end and pass-through NEs appear in the Route list.
b. Go to step 20.

25 To change the route


a. Tab to the Short Route button:
If you want Long Route Then
selected step b
not selected step c

b. Using the down arrow key, move to the Long button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Short button is deselected. The Long button is selected.
Go to step 26.
c. Select the Short button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Short button is selected. The Long button is deselected.

26 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed, prompting you to confirm the changes
you have made to the connection.
27 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The revised connection is listed in the main
window.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-43

Procedure 5-4
Editing a connection (continued)

Step Action

28 To close the tool:


a. Display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 8


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 7
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 4
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third

5
13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

b. Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


A confirmation dialogue is displayed, prompting you to save any
connection changes to the backup OPC.
FW00723A

Changes have been made to the connection data.

Do you wish to transfer these changes to the Backup


OPC before closing the tool?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ] [ CCancel ♦ Del ]

c. Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The connection changes are
transferred to the backup OPC. The tool is closed.

29 If the ring contains NEs in other OPC spans of control, repeat steps 1 to 28
for the remaining OPCs.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-44 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Deleting a connection
Use this procedure to delete a connection between two network elements in
the OPC span of control. The connection is removed permanently from the
OPC and NE connection data.

If a configuration contains network elements in other OPC spans of control,


you must repeat this procedure for all OPCs.

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.

CAUTION
Risk to equipment or loss of data
This procedure affects any traffic being carried by the
connection. Ensure that the facilities are out of service before
you delete an STM-1 connection. (See Provisioning and
Operations Procedures, 323-1211-310.)

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 5-5
Deleting a connection

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-45

Procedure 5-5
Deleting a connection (continued)

Step Action

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager

Connections sorted by End NE A


View Utilities
5
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—I

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-46 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-5
Deleting a connection (continued)

Step Action

2 In the Connection list, move to a connection that you want to detail and
display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW01234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 1 14 STM1e G16 4


12 STM1e G3 3 12 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e 1G5 1 13
Details... STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 1 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e 2G1 Edit...
1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e 3G1 Delete
2 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e STM1e G7
4G1 3
Show 13
primary gateway selectors... 3
5 VC-3 Path Trace provisioning
6 VC-3 Path Trace retrieval
7 Select
8 Deselect
9 Help ♦H

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Move to the Delete command and select it by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The following dialogue is displayed.
FW00235A

You are about to delete this connection.


Configuration : Ring1
Connection ID : fourth
End NE A : 12
End NE Z : 13
Any traffic provisioned on this connection will be lost.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

4 In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The connection is deleted from the OPC
and network element connection data. The connection is removed from the
main window.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-47

Procedure 5-5
Deleting a connection (continued)

Step Action

5 To close the tool:


a. Display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 8


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 7
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 4
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third

5
13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

b. Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


A confirmation dialogue appears, prompting you to save any
connection changes to the backup OPC.
FW00723A

Changes have been made to the connection data.

Do you wish to transfer these changes to the Backup


OPC before closing the tool?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ] [ CCancel ♦ Del ]

c. Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue disappears. The connection changes are
transferred to the backup OPC. The tool is closed.

6 If a configuration contains network elements in other OPC spans of control,


repeat steps 1 to 5 for the remaining OPCs.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-48 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Scheduling an audit of connection data


Use this procedure to specify the frequency, time, and date for a connection
data audit.

The operations controller (OPC) data is compared with that from all network
elements in the OPC span of control. Results of the audit are found in the
Event Browser.

Note 1: The start date for a scheduled audit must be either today or
tomorrow. Any other date that you enter is invalid and the tool prompts you
to enter another date.
Note: To conduct an immediate audit of all or selected network elements,
see Procedure 5-7 on page 5-52.

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 5-6
Scheduling an audit of connection data

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846.
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-49

Procedure 5-6
Scheduling an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities


5
Connections sorted by End NE A
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-50 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-6
Scheduling an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

2 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Move to the Schedule connection audits command and select it by


pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The Schedule Connection Data Audit dialogue is displayed, showing the
previously entered settings.
FW00357A

Schedule Connection Data Audit

Run every: > 1 ( ) minute (s)


( ) hour (s)
(♦) day (s)

(hh:mm mm/dd/yyyy)
Next Run: > 15:20 09/05/1993<<
[ Default ]

[OK ♦ Return ] [Cancel ♦ Del ]

If you want to Then go to


enter the default settings (every day, starting at 7 a.m. step 4
today)
enter a non-default frequency, time, or date step 5

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-51

Procedure 5-6
Scheduling an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

4 Tab to the Default button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Fields in the dialogue are set to conduct an audit once a day, at 7 a.m.,
starting today. If the current time is past 7 a.m., the audit start date is set to
tomorrow's date.
Go to step 11.
5 To change the frequency of the audit, tab to the Run every field and enter how
often you want the audit to be conducted. Valid values for this field differ,
according to which time button is selected:
If time selected button is Then
minute(s) 15–59
hour(s) 1–23
day(s) 1–7

6 Tab to the time buttons and, using the arrow keys, move to the button you
5
want to select (that is, minutes, hours, or days).
7 Select the time button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The previous button is deselected. A diamond appears beside the button you
have selected.
8 Tab to the Starting field and enter the hour and minutes.
Remember to enter a colon (:) between the hours and minutes.
9 Tab to the date field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed.
10 Select today, or move to tomorrow and select it, by pressing Space (or
Keypad 0).
11 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Schedule Connection Data Audit dialogue closes. The audit is conducted
at the time and date specified in the dialogue.
12 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-52 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Performing an audit of connection data


Use this procedure to perform a data audit of some or all network elements in
the operations controller (OPC) span of control.

The Connection Manager displays the results of the audit as soon as the audit
is complete. The tool then allows you to overwrite the network element
connection data if the audit finds discrepancies between the OPC and network
elements.

To schedule an audit for a later date, see Procedure 5-6.

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the Connection
Manager tool
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 5-7
Performing an audit of connection data

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-53

Procedure 5-7
Performing an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager

Connections sorted by End NE A


View Utilities
5
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-54 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-7
Performing an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

2 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Move to the Audit connections command and select it by pressing Space


(or Keypad 0).
The STM-1 Connection Audit dialogue is displayed. By default, all network
elements in the OPC span of control are included in the audit.
FW00724A

Connection Audit
Configuration: > third <

Network Elements to audit:


Network Element
13 Included
12 Included

[ OK ♦Return ] [ Cancel ♦Del ]

If the configuration name is Then go to


correct step 6
not correct step 4

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-55

Procedure 5-7
Performing an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

4 In the Configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you.
5 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
6
If you want to Then go to
exclude a network element from the audit step 7
audit all network elements in the list step 8

7 To exclude an NE from the audit: 5


a. In the Network Element list, move to the NE that you want to exclude
and display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW00724B

Connection Audit
Configuration: > third <

Network Elements to audit:


Network Element
13 11 Add Included
12 2 Remove
Included

3 Select >>
4 Deselect >>
[ OK ♦Return ] 5 Help ♦Del ]
[ Cancel ♦H

b. Move to the Remove command and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or


Keypad 0).
Beside the list item, the word ‘Included’ changes to ‘Not included’.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each network element that you want to
exclude.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-56 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-7
Performing an audit of connection data (continued)

Step Action

8 Tab to the OK button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The STM-1 Connection Audit dialogue closes. The connection data for the
specified network elements is audited. A dialogue like the following is
displayed, indicating the results of the audit.
FW00725A

The connection data audit has completed with the following results:

13 successful
12 successful

OK ♦Return ]
[O

If the audit finds Then go to


no discrepancies between the OPC and network element step 11
connection data
discrepancies and you want to overwrite network element step 9
connection data
discrepancies, but you do NOT want to overwrite network step 10
element connection data

9 If you want to overwrite network element connection data.


a. In the dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A
(or Keypad 0).
The Results dialogue closes. A confirmation dialogue is displayed.
b. In the confirmation dialogue, tab to the Yes button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Connection data at the affected network elements is overwritten by
the OPC connection data.
c. Go to step 12.
10 In the dialogue, select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Results dialogue closes. All network elements retain their original
connection data.
Go to step 12.
11 In the Results dialogue, select the OK button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad
0).
The Results dialogue closes.
12 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-57

Performing a manual backup of connection data


Use this procedure to transfer all data, including connection data, to the
backup operations controller (OPC). Data is transferred for all network
elements in the OPC span of control.

Connection data is backed up in two ways:


• automatically, during the OPC data synchronization
• manually (that is, optionally)
— before the Connection Manager closes
— using the following procedure

Therefore, the following procedure is likely to be performed only after you


have made some connection changes, but want to leave the tool open.

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.
5
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the Connection
Manager tool
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-58 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-8
Performing a manual backup of STM-1 connection data

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data
for systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

If your system Then


uses external select the No button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Do not perform this procedure
does not use tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A
external (or Keypad 0)
provisioning Continue with this step

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW00234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4


12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
tthird 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-59

Procedure 5-8
Performing a manual backup of STM-1 connection data (continued)

Step Action

2 Display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press Shift +.


The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 Transfer data 4toG16
45M 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

5
[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

3 Move to the Transfer data to backup OPC command and select it by


pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).
A confirmation dialogue is displayed, prompting you to confirm your request.
FW00703A

Transferring data to the backup OPC will cause any


existing data on the backup OPC to be overwritten.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

4 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. An information dialogue is displayed,
indicating that the current connection data is being transferred to the backup
OPC.
FW00706A

Warning

Your request to transfer connection data


to the backup OPC has been initiated.
Please check the Event Browser logs for
the result of the transfer

[O K ♦ Return ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-60 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-8
Performing a manual backup of STM-1 connection data (continued)

Step Action

5 To remove the dialogue, select the OK button by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad
0).
The dialogue closes. The tool's main window remains open.
6 Continue with other procedures you want to perform using the Connection
Manager.
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up tributary connections using the OPC 5-61

Displaying the connection map for an ADM node (from the network
element user interface)
Use this procedure to display the connection map for an add-drop multiplexer
(ADM) node through the command input area of the network element user
interface. The connmap command displays the following information for each
connection:
• connection type (that is, whether the connection is pass-through or
add/drop)
• connection rate
• tributary used by add connections (identified by facility)
• state of the tributary. If there is a preprovisioned connection, but the facility
and equipment have yet to be provisioned. “unequipped” is shown for the
tributary information. If the facility has been preprovisioned, but no circuit
pack is yet present, both the facility and “unequipped” are shown. If an
invalid circuit pack is installed in a tributary slot, question (??) are
displayed
• squelch information, which is the source (a) and destination (z) ADM 5
nodes. The traffic on an STM-1 connection is squelched should it be
misconnected during an automatic protection switch
• blanks are displayed for unprovisioned channels

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 5-9
Displaying the STM-1 connection map for an ADM node (from the network
element user interface)

Step Action

1 If necessary, log in to the network element user interface.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
2 Enter the following commands:
quit all ↵
connmap ↵
Note: Entering quit all leaves the MAPCI and FWPUI environment. The
connmap command should not be entered in the MAPCI and FWPUI.
A full-screen report, similar to Figure 5-5, is displayed, showing the
connection information. The information is listed first for the G1 STM-16
circuit pack group, then for G2.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


5-62 Setting up tributary connections using the OPC

Procedure 5-9 Displaying the STM-1 connection map for an ADM node (from the
network element user interface) (continued)

Step Action

3
If you want to Then enter
page through the report y↵
leave the report before you have paged completely n↵
through it

Figure 5-5
Sample output from the connmap command
FW00727A

CI:
>
>connmap
Connections for STM16 G1

Seca a z Secz
STM Type Rate Tributary NEid NEid NEid NEid
--- ---- ---- --------- --- --- --- ---
1 Uni Drop VC-4 34M G15 1 - 12 14 -
2 Add/Drop STM-1 STM-1 G9 1 uneqp - 8550 8551 -
3 Passthru STM-1 - - 8555 8552 -
4-6 Passthru STM-1 - - 8554 8551 -
7 - - - - - - -
8 Add/Drop STM-1 STM-1 G7 2 8554 8550 8551 8552
9 Add/Drop STM-1 STM-1 G8 1 - 8551 8550 8555
10 - - - - - - -
11 - - - - - - -
12 - - - - - - -

>Continue ? (y/n)
>Please confirm (“Yes” or “No”)
>

—end—

end of chapter

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


6-1

Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3


connections using the OPC 6-
This chapter contains procedures for setting up VC3 (34M) connections and
VC4 pipes for linear and ring configurations. Most procedures can be used for
either configuration and differences are highlighted. The procedures in this
chapter address adding, deleting, and modifying connections, displaying and
modifying connection lists, and auditing connections. The procedures
outlined use the operations controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool.
However connections at a given add-drop multiplexer (ADM) node can be
displayed through the command input (CI) area of the network element user
interface (refer to Chapter 5 for details).

Definitions: connection and configuration


The following definitions are required in order to understand the concepts and
6
accurately carry-out the procedures in this chapter.

Definitions: pipe
In this chapter, the term “pipe” is used to indicate a VC4 link established via
an STM-1 channel between two network elements (both network elements
must be in the same configuration). A VC4 pipe exists solely to carry VC3
connections between 34M tributaries fitted to Network Elements in Ring or
linear systems.

Figure 6-1 shows a ring configuration where 34M ports 1, 2 and 3 on network
elements NE01 and NE03 are connected via a VC4 pipe over an STM-1
channel.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-2 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Figure 6-1
A VC4 pipe in a ring configuration
FW00711A

NE 04
STM-1 Channel

34M
NE 01 NE 03 Ports 1, 2 & 3

34M
Ports 1, 2 & 3

NE 02

STM-1 channel

VC3/34M
connections

VC4 pipe

Definitions: connection
In this chapter, the term “connection” is used very specifically to mean a link
established between a tributary circuit at one network element and a tributary
circuit at another network element via an STM-16 channel (or channels)
between two network elements. Both network elements must be in the same
configuration.

For example, Figure 6-2 shows a ring configuration where tributary K at


network element N1 is connected to tributary L at network element N3 via the
STM-16 channels between N1 and N3.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-3

Figure 6-2
A connection in a ring configuration
FW00711A

FW-26122

Tributary K

N1 N2

Legend
Tributary
N6 Ring optics

N5 N4 N3 Tributary L

Note 1: In the figure, “Ring optics” refers to the two STM-16 channels that
connect all network elements in the ring. Each channel is composed of two
optical fibres, one for transmitting and one for receiving. Hence, the
channels are bidirectional. One channel transmits in one direction around
the ring, and the other transmits in the opposite direction. 6
Definition: configuration
In this chapter, the term “configuration” is used very specifically to mean the
groupings of network elements formed when the OPC Configuration
Manager tool is used to define a configuration.

There are two types of configurations: linear and ring. Figures 6-1 and 6-2
illustrate a ring configuration. Ring configurations use network elements
configured as add-drop multiplexers (ADMs). A linear configuration consists
of a point-to-point connection between two network elements. Linear
configurations use network elements configured as terminals.

Table 6-1 summarizes the STM-16 architectures supported by the


Configuration Manager tool.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-4 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Table 6-1
STM-16 architectures supported by the Configuration Manager tool

Architecture Configur Network Direction Available Termination


ation element channels
type

MS SPRing ring ADM unidirectional Working Add & Drop


timeslots 1 to 8 Add & Drop multipoint
for both Break & Insert
channels. Break
Drop & Continue

1:N linear: terminal bidirectional Working End to End, no


(multipoint-to one for timeslots 1 to 8 intermediate
-multipoint) each for both terminations
channel channels.

For more detailed descriptive information, refer to System Description, 323-1211-100.

A configuration is distinguished by the fact that all network elements in the


configuration are connected together with the same STM-16 channel(s). In
terms of the physical installation, this means that the STM-16 optical
interface(s) at each network element are connected to the STM-16 optical
interface(s) at the other network element(s) in the configuration.

In Figure 6-2, each architecture represents one configuration except 1:N. In


the 1:N case, the STM-16 channels are not connected to every network
element. Each channel in the 1:N configuration is only connected to two
network elements, one at one site and one at the other site. Hence, a separate
configuration must be defined for each channel.

In the other architectures, even though there may be more than one STM-16
channel, all channels are connected to each network element in the
architecture.

Connection Manager tool


The main purpose of the Connection Manager tool is to provision VC3
(34M), VC4 pipe, 140MBit/s, STM-1e, STM-1o, or STM-4o connections in
an OPC span of control (refer to Chapter 5 for 140MBit/s, STM-1e, STM-1o,
or STM-4o connection).

For a detailed description of the tool, refer to User Interface Description,


323-1211-301. By default, the Connection Manager tool is found in the
Network Admin and Network Surveillance toolsets of the OPC user interface.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-5

The main window of the tool lists all connections that have been set up, for all
configurations in the OPC span of control. The tool allows you to do the
following:
• provision VC4 pipes to carry VC3 connections
• provision VC3 (34M) connections
• add termination points (add, drop, drop & continue, break, break & insert)
within VC3 connections
• display all connections in the ring, including any connections that
terminate in another OPC span of control
• filter the connection list to show only the connections you are interested in,
for example, only connections in a specified configuration
• view VC3 (34M), VC4 pipe, and STM-1 channels in use between two NEs
• view facilities in use at an NE
• audit the connection data at specified NEs
• modify a connection.

Provisioning connections
The Connection Manager tool requires you to define each VC3 connection
individually and the definition is confined to configuration boundaries. A VC4
pipe must be set up to carry a set of three VC3 connections. The following rules
apply when configuring 34M connections:
6
• You must add a VC4 pipe before you add VC3 connections
• You can add termination points while adding a VC3 connection
• You cannot edit a VC4 pipe if it contains VC3 connections (these must first
be deleted)
• Each termination of a VC4 pipe must be associated with a tributary card to
allow provisioning of VC3 connections

A 34M connection between two network elements in the same configuration is


completely defined by specifying:
• the two network elements at either end of the connection within a specific
configuration
• the 34M tributaries (See Note 1).
• the VC4 pipe
• the STM-1 channel for which the VC4 pipe is provisioned.

Note: The 34M tributaries are the facilities (connection points and circuit
packs) at the end network elements that provide the service access points
for the traffic entering/leaving the configuration. These network elements
are ADMs in ring configurations and terminals (LTEs) in linear
configurations. The information required to define the connection is the
type of tributary (34M), the circuit pack group (CPG 13 to 16), and the port
number on the shelf that serves the tributary. Note that “port” refers to ports
on tributaries.

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-6 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

34M tributaries
The STM-16 network element supports bidirectional 34M tributaries.
However, 34M services are unidirectional on rings and bidirectional on linear
systems.

For the current TN16X release the 34M tributary circuits at each network
element can fitted to quadrant 4 only. The procedures for setting up
connections in this chapter are similar to those for STM-4o, STM-1o,
STM-1e and 140M tributaries. However, when setting up 34M tributary
connections, corresponding VC4 ‘pipes’ must be established (each VC4 pipe
carries three VC3 connections).

Connection types
The STM-16 network element supports STM-1 connections over the STM-16
channel. For a ring and linear configuration, VC4 pipe connections can be set
up on channels 1 to 8. For a linear configuration, VC4 connections can be set
up for all 16 timeslots. An STM connection retains the same timeslot(s)
through all pass-through ADMs.

Chapter task list


The following tasks are included in this chapter. The task ‘Add a connection’
is a prerequisite for all other tasks in the list. After connections have been set
up, other tasks can be performed at any time and in any order.

Task Page

Displaying 34M connections in the ring page 6-7


Adding a 34M connection page 6-14
Editing a 34M ring connection page 6-24
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections page 6-30
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections page 6-37
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections page 6-41
Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections page 6-45
Auditing path trace for VC3 connections page 6-48
Auditing 34M connection data page 6-52

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-7

Displaying 34M connections in the ring


Use this procedure to display information for 34M connections in the ring.
Using this procedure, you can display the following information:
• a summary of all 34M connections that were provisioned using the
operations controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool
• tributary facilities at a specified network element (both available and in
use)
Note 1: Only the connections that were provisioned using the operations
controller (OPC) Connection Manager tool are displayed.
Note 2: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. For
consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are shown. These
screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
described in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring 6
Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended. The warning does not
apply to this procedure.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

2 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-8 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

The Connection Manager main window is displayed.


FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

If you want to Then go to


display VC3 channel usage for a specified pair of NEs step 14
display VC3 connections throughout the system continue to step 3

3 In the Connection list, move to the VC3 connection that you want to detail and
display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Keypad Enter).
The list item menu is displayed.
FW01234A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

fourth 12 STM1e G2 1 14 STM1e G16 4


12 STM1e G3 3 12 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 11 13
Details... STM1e G5 5
12 STM1e G6 1 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 21 Edit...
12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 32 Delete
12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 43 STM1e
13primary gateway
Show G7
selectors... 3
5 VC-3 Path Trace provisioning
6 VC-3 Path Trace retrieval
7 Select
8 Deselect
9 Help ♦H

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-9

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

4 Select the Details command by pressing Space (or Keypad 0).


The VC3 Details dialogue is displayed.
FW01230A

VC-3 Connection Details

Configuration: tn-16x 01
Connection ID: 1
VC-4 pipe: VC4 01 Direction: G2 VC-3 ch: 2
End NE A: 1 Trib: 34M G13 Port: 2
End NE Z: 3 Trib: 34M G13 Port: 2

NE Action Tributary
12 Add 34M G13 Port 2
13 Drop & Continue 34M G13 Port 2
14 Drop 34M G13 Port 2

[ D
Done ♦Return]

5 To close the Details dialogue, select the Done button by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The Details dialogue closes 6
6 In the main window, display the Utilities menu by pressing Ctrl_L T, then press
Shift +.
The Utilities menu is displayed.
FW00717A

>. Connection Manager View Utilities

1 Show STM-1 channel usage ... ♦1


Connections sorted by End NE A
2 Show tributary usage ... ♦2
Showing: All connections
3 Show primary gateway selectors ... ♦3
4 Audit connections ...
Connection Id End NE A Tributary 5
End Schedule
NE Z connection
STM-1 audits ...
6 VC-3 Path Trace Audit
fourth 12 STM1e G2 127 45M
Transfer data 4toG16 1
backup OPC
12 STM1e G3 12 45M
18 G3 2
12 STM1e G5 13 45M G5 3 12
12 STM1e G6 138 Help 45M G6 2 23
first 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

7 Move to the Show tributary usage command and select it by pressing Space
(or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-10 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

The Tributary Usage dialogue is displayed.


FW00356A

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > TN-16x01 <
NE : > <

Slot Tributary Usage

[ Done ♦Return ]

This dialog allows you to view the tributary usage for a selected NE.
8 In the Configuration field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, listing the configurations that are available to
you
9 Using the down arrow key move to the configuration you want and select it by
pressing Space (or Keypad 0).
The configuration name is displayed in the Configuration field.
10 Tab to the NE field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3).
The chooser menu is displayed, showing the network elements available to
you.
11 Move to the network element that you want to display and select it by pressing
Space (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-11

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

The network element ID is displayed in the field. All tributary facilities for the
selected network element are shown in the Tributary list.
FW00356A

Tributary Usage
Configuration: > TN-16x01 <
NE : > 12 <

Slot Tributary Usage


2 140M G1 Available
36 34M G13 Available
37 34M G14 Not Available
38 34M G15 Not Available

[ Done ♦Return ]

The status of each tributary is displayed in the usage column by the following
indicators:
Usage Status 6
Available Indicates a tributary currently available for use

Not Available Indicates a tributary not currently available for use

12 Move to the 34M tributary card you wish to display and select it by pressing
Space (or Keypad 0). Display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3) and select the Port usage option.
The Port Usage dialogue is displayed
.FW01232A
Port Usage
Configuration: > TN-16X Ring <
NE : > 13 <

Tributary: > 34M G13 < Slot: 36

Port Connections Usage


1 Add: vc3 connection Not Available
Drop Available
2 Add Available
Drop Available
3 Add Available
Drop Available

[ OK ♦Return ]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-12 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

13 To close the Port Usage dialogue, tab to the OK button and select it by
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Port Usage dialogue closes.
Go to Step 19
14 In the main window, tab to the Manage VC-3 Connections button and select
it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Manage VC-3 Connections dialogue is displayed.
> . Connection Manager
FW01215A
View Utilities
Manage VC-3 Connections

Configuration > R12 <


VC-4 Pipe > Pipe04 < Direction > G1 <
Show between: NE A > 12 < and NE Z > 13 <

Conn Id NE A Trib Port NE Z Trib Port Rate Cha


VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 VC3 4
VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 VC3 4

[ Done Return] [ Add +] [ VC-3 Channel Usage ]

15 Tab to the VC-3 Channel Usage button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The VC3 channel usage dialogue is displayed.
FW01231A

VC-3 Channel Usage

Configuration > TN-16x01 <


VC-4 Pipe: > < Direction > < STM-1 Channel:
End NE A: < End NE Z: <

VC3 Channel Usage

[ Done ♦Return ]

16 In the End NE A field, display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L / (or
Keypad 3). Use the up or down arrow key to move to the configuration you
want and select it by pressing Spacebar (or Keypad 0). You can select the NE
at the End NE Z field in the same way.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-13

Procedure 6-1
Displaying connections in the ring (continued)

Step Action

17 Tab to the pipe name field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/
(or Keypad 3). Use the up or down arrow key to move to the VC4 pipe on
which you want and select it by pressing Spacebar (or Keypad 0)
18 Tab to the Direction field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/
(or Keypad 3). Use the up or down arrow key to move to the G1 or G2 direction
as required and select it by pressing Spacebar (or Keypad 0).
The VC3 channel usage for the selected connection is displayed in the list
box.
FW01231B

VC-3 Channel Usage

Configuration > TN-16x01 <


VC-4 Pipe: > VC401 < Direction > G1 < STM-1 Channel: 1
End NE A: 12 < End NE Z: 14 <

VC3 Channel Usage


1 Not Available
2 Available
3 Available
6
[ Done ♦Return ]

19 To close the VC-3 Channel Usage dialogue, tab to the Done button and select
it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The VC-3 Channel Usage dialogue closes.
20 Close the tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-14 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Adding a 34M connection


Use this procedure to add a logical 34M connection to the connection data.
There are two principal components when establishing 34M connections:

1. Setting up VC4 pipes to carry VC3 connections

2. Setting up individual VC3 connections

You must add a VC4 pipe connection before you set up corresponding VC3
connections. Each 34M tributary contains three VC3 channels. A VC4 pipe is
used to carry three VC3 connections. This procedure includes steps for adding
a VC4 connection and the corresponding VC3 connections.

For the connection to carry traffic, the appropriate equipment must be


installed and tributary facilities must be provisioned and placed in service at
each end network element. (See Installation Procedures, 323-1211-201 to
install facilities and Provisioning and Operations Procedures, 323-1211-310
to provision facilities.) The following procedure can be done either before or
after the tributary facilities are provisioned.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-15

Recording connection data


Figure 6-3 can be copied and used to record connection data.
Figure 6-3
Connection data table
FW00719A

Connection table
OPC:

Configuration:

Connection ID:

Connection Termination A

End NE A:

Tributary (Type, CPG & port*):

Connection Termination Z

End NE Z:
Tributary (Type, CPG & port*):

STM-1
STS-1 Channel:
6
Connection Rate:

Route:

* " Port" refers to ports on electrical tributaries and channels on optical tributaries

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-16 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must:
• have a system that does not use external provisioning
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• ensure that the Configuration Manager:Linear or the Configuration
Manager:Ring tool is closed
• obtain the following configuration information:
— an ID for the new connection
— the end network element IDs in the connection
— the tributary facilities (that is, the type, group number, and port/channel
number for both end NEs in the connection)
— the channel(s) that you want to assign to the connection
— direction around the ring (for ring configurations only)

• prepare a map of the nodes and connections you want to set up; this is
especially helpful if you are setting up connections across multiple
configurations or more than one span of control
• read the command conventions for this type of user interface in Common
Procedures, 323-1211-846
Note: The first part of this procedure applies to both ring and linear
configurations. For consistency, only screens using a ring configuration are
shown. These screens will differ slightly for a linear connection.

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection

Step Action

Part I - Adding a VC4 pipe


1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-17

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

2 Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0
[ Manage VC-4 ]
FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0
[ Manage VC-3 ]
PrfAlrt 0 15:35 6
3 In the main window, tab to the Manage VC-4 button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Manage VC-4 pipes dialogue is displayed.
FW01212A

Manage VC-4 Pipes

Configuration > R12 <

Pipe ID Channel ID
Pipe01 1
Pipe02 2
Pipe03 3

[ Done Return] [ Add +]

4 Tab to the Configuration field and display the chooser menu by pressing
Ctrl_L (or Keypad 3). Use the arrow keys to highlight the TN-16X
configuration you require and select it by pressing spacebar.
Proceed according to the configuration:
If this is Then go to
a linear configuration step 9
a ring configuration continue to step 5

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-18 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

5 Tab to the Add button, and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Add VC-4 pipe dialogue is displayed.
FW01213A

Add VC-4 Pipe

Pipe Name: > pipe04

STM-1 Channel: > 4

Direction G1 Direction G2
NE: Tributary NE: Tributary
12 - - - - - 12 - - - - -
13 - - - - - 13 - - - - -
14 - - - - - 14 - - - - -

[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Enter the name of the VC4 pipe at the Pipe Name field. Then specify the STM
channel (1 to 8) at the STM-1 Channel field. A cross is placed to the left of the
field if an invalid VC4 pipe name is entered.
6 In ring systems you must associate tributary equipment with each pipe in one
or other direction to allow addition of corresponding VC3 connections. For the
newly added pipe, you must specify the NE which contains the 34M
equipment you wish to associate with the pipe.
Tab to the Direction G1 or G2 table and select an NE by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0). Display the Associate Tributary dialogue by pressing Keypad 2.
Display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3).
The Associate Tributary dialogue is displayed.
FW01214A
Associate Tributary

NE: 12

Tributary > <


34M G13
34M G14
34M G15
34M G16
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

7 Tab to the Tributary field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3). Use the arrow keys to highlight the tributary you wish to associate
with the VC4 pipe and press spacebar to select it.
Tab to the OK field and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog
8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the other tributaries you wish to associate with the
pipe.
When you have associated the tributaries required, tab to the OK field and
press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-19

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

The Add VC-4 pipe dialogue closes. A confirmation dialogue is displayed if


the connection data are correct. If there are errors in the data, an error dialog
appears and Xs are placed beside the fields where the errors occurred.
Correct these fields and select the OK button again.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful.


You are about to add this connection

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

Proceed to step 13
9 Tab to the Add button, and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Add VC-4 pipe dialogue is displayed.
FW01213A

Add VC-4 Pipe

6
Configuration: 1-2-3-4

Pipe Name: > pipe04


STM-1 Channel: > 4
Direction G1 Direction G2
NE: Tributary NE: Tributary
1 34M G13 1 34M G13
2 34M G15 2 34M G15
3 34M G13 3 34M G13
4 34M G15 4 34M G15

[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Enter the name of the VC4 pipe at the Pipe Name field. Then specify the STM
channel (1 to 16) at the STM-1 Channel field. A cross is placed to the left of
the field if an invalid VC4 pipe name is entered.
10 In linear systems, you must associate tributary equipment with each
bidirectional pipe to allow automatic addition of corresponding VC3
connections. For the newly added pipe, you must specify the NE which
contains the 34M equipment you wish to associate with the pipe.
Tab to the NE/tributary table and select an NE/Tributary by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0). Display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3) and
select the Associate Tributary option by pressing spacebar.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-20 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

The Associate Tributary dialogue is displayed.


FW01214A

Associate Tributary

Direction G1
NE: 2
Tributary > <
34M G13
34M G14
34M G15
34M G16
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

11 Tab to the Tributary field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3). Use the arrow keys to highlight the tributary in NE A which you
wish to associate with the VC4 pipe and press spacebar to select it.
Tab to the OK field and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the tributary in NE Z you wish to associate with
the pipe. When you have associated the tributaries required, the
corresponding VC3 connections are automatically configured with straight
mapping between the three ports on the endpoint tributaries and the three
VC3 channels.
Tab to the OK field and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog.
The Add VC-4 pipe dialogue closes. A confirmation dialogue is displayed if
the connection data are correct. If there are errors in the data, an error dialog
appears and Xs are placed beside the fields where the errors occurred.
Correct these fields and select the OK button again.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful.


You are about to add this connection

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

Close the Manage VC-4 pipe dialogue by tabbing to the Done field and
pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Proceed to Step 16 to exit the tool.
Part II - Adding VC3 connections
13 In the main window, tab to the Manage VC-3 button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-21

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

The Manage VC-3 Connections dialogue is displayed.


FW01215A
Manage VC-3 Connections

Configuration > R12 <


VC-4 Pipe > < Direction > <
Show between: NE A < and NE Z <

Conn Id NE A Trib Port NE Z Trib Port Rate Cha

[ Done Return] [ Add +] [ VC-3 Channel Usage ]

14 Tab to the Add button, and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Add VC-3 Connections dialogue is displayed.
FW01213A 6
Add VC-3 Connections

Configuration > TN-16X Ring <


Connection ID [ ] High Priority
VC-4 Pipe > < Dir > < VC-3 ch
End NE A < Trib: Port
End NE Z < Trib: Port

NE Action Tributary

[ Add Termination ]
[ OK Return] [ Apply ] [ Cancel Del]

—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-22 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

You must enter a unique Connection ID for the VC3 connection you wish to
add. Press 3 in the numeric keypad to display chooser menus where
available, press spacebar to select the option required.
at field specify

Configuration The TN-16X configuration. The current configuration is


selected by default

Connection ID A unique connection ID

High Priority Select to prevent any modifications to the path

VC-4 pipe The VC4 pipe in which you wish to add a VC3 connection

Dir The direction (G1 or G2) of the connection you wish to


add

VC-3 ch The VC3 channel you wish to add (1, 2, or 3)

End NE A The NE at which the VC3 signal is added

Port The corresponding 34M port on which the VC3 signal is


added

End NE Z The NE at which the VC3 signal is dropped (and not


continued)

Port The corresponding 34M port on which the VC3 signal is


dropped

When you have specified the necessary parameters, tab to the Apply button
and press Ctrl_A.
The VC3 connection you are adding appears in the window list area.
Tab to the OK field and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog.
Note: It is also possible to add termination points while adding a VC3
connection (refer to ).
15 Repeat step 14 for each VC3 connection you wish to set up.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-23

Procedure 6-2
Adding a 34M connection (continued)

Step Action

16 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W


(or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 8
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 6
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

6
[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


The tool is closed.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-24 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Editing a 34M ring connection


Use this procedure to modify the parameters of an existing 34M ring
connection. 34M linear connections cannot be edited; these must be deleted
and new connections added as detailed in Procedure 6-2.

Each 34M connection consists of two principal components:


• The VC3 connection between two 34M ports
• The VC4 pipe on which the VC3 connection is carried

Either component may be edited, however you cannot edit a VC4 pipe unless
you first delete the VC3 connections it carries.

Editing the connection ID can be done in service. Editing any other


connection information cannot be done in service. When editing information
other than the ID, you must ensure that the facilities are out of service before
you perform the following procedure. See Provisioning and Operations
Procedures, 323-1211-310.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-25

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3 _1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

6
If you wish to Then
edit a VC3 go to step 7
connection Note: in linear systems you cannot edit VC3
connections separately as they are automatically
configured when you establish a VC4 pipe
connection.
edit a VC4 pipe you must first delete any VC3 connections set up in
the VC4 pipe (refer to Procedure 6-5). When you
have deleted the VC3 connections, continue to the
next step.

Part l - Editing a VC4 Pipe


2 In the main window, tab to the Manage VC-4 button and select it by pressing
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-26 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection (continued)

Step Action

The Manage VC-4 pipes dialogue is displayed.


FW01212A

Manage VC-4 Pipes

Configuration > R12 <

Pipe ID Channel ID
Pipe01 1
Pipe02 2
Pipe03 3

[ Done Return] [ Add +]

3 For ring configurations, tab to the window list area and use the arrow keys to
highlight the VC4 pipe you wish to edit. Select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad
0).
Press Ctrl_L (or Enter in the numeric keypad) to display the list item menu.
Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Edit option and press spacebar to select it.
The Edit VC-4 pipe dialogue is displayed.
FW01213A

Edit VC-4 Pipe

Pipe Name: > pipe04

STM-1 Channel: > 4

Direction G1 Direction G2
NE: Tributary NE: Tributary
12 - - - - - 12 - - - - -
13 - - - - - 13 - - - - -
14 - - - - - 14 - - - - -

[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Using this dialog, you can edit the VC4 pipe name or the associations with
34M tributary cards.
4 To edit the VC4 pipe name, tab to the Pipe Name field and overwrite with the
new name.
To edit tributary associations, tab to the Direction G1 or G2 table and select
an NE/Tributary by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0). Display the chooser menu
by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3) and select the Associate Tributary option by
pressing spacebar.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-27

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection (continued)

Step Action

The Associate Tributary dialogue is displayed.


FW01214A
Associate Tributary

NE: 12

Tributary > <


34M G13
34M G14
34M G15
34M G16
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

5 Tab to the Tributary field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/ (or
Keypad 3). Use the arrow keys to highlight the tributary you wish to associate
with the VC4 pipe and press spacebar to select it.
Tab to the OK field and press Ctrl_A(or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other tributary associations you wish to edit.
When you have finished making the edits required, tab to the OK field and
press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog.
The Edit VC-4 pipe dialogue closes. A confirmation dialogue is displayed if
the connection data are correct.
FW00721A
6
Data validation was successful.
You are about to edit this connection

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

Proceed to the next step to edit VC3 connections, or to Step 10 to close the tool.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-28 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection (continued)

Step Action

Part II - Editing VC3 connections


7 In the main (Connection Manager) window, tab to the connections list area.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the connection you wish to edit.
Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Edit option and press spacebar
to select it.
The Edit VC-3 Connections dialogue is displayed.
FW01219A

Edit VC-3 Connections

Configuration > TN-16X Ring <


Connection ID vc3_2 [ ] High Priority
VC-4 Pipe > pipe04 < Dir > G1 < VC-3 ch 2
End NE A 12 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2
End NE Z 13 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2

NE Action Tributary
U 12 Add 34M G13 Port 2
14 Drop 34M G13 Port 2

[ Add Termination ]
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Using this dialog, you can edit the VC3 connection ID or the individual
terminations within the VC3 connection.
8 To edit the VC3 Connection ID, tab to the Connection ID field and overwrite
with the new name.
To delete individual terminations, tab to the terminations list and use the up
and down arrow keys to scroll through the list items. Select an NE/Tributary
termination by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0). Display the chooser menu by
pressing Ctrl_L/ (or Keypad 3), scroll to the Delete option and select it by
pressing spacebar.
To add a termination, refer to Procedure 6-4, Adding and Deleting
terminations to VC3 connections.
When you have made the necessary edits, tab to the OK button and press
Ctrl_A.
A warning and confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful. You are about to


edit this connection.

WARNING! This command will be service affecting if


the connection is carrying traffic.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-29

Procedure 6-3
Editing a 34M ring connection (continued)

Step Action

Tab to the Yes button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to save your edits and
exit the dialog.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each VC3 connection you wish to edit.
10 To close the tool:
a. Display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad 6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

STM1e connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Ch


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 8
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 6
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 7
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 4
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

6
[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

b. Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


If a backup OPC exists, a confirmation dialogue is displayed
prompting you to save any connection changes .
FW00723A

Changes have been made to the connection data.

Do you wish to transfer these changes to the Backup


OPC before closing the tool?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ] [ CCancel ♦ Del ]

c. Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The confirmation dialogue closes. The connection changes are
transferred to the backup OPC. The tool is closed.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-30 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections


Use this procedure to add intermediate termination points to existing VC3
(34M) connections. Termination points are the ports at which 34M signals
can be added, dropped, broken or inserted. By default, End NE A is an Add
termination point and End NE Z is a Drop termination point. The Add
Termination function only allows you to select intermediate NE’s, i.e. those
between NE A and NE Z, and add further Drop terminations at the Drop NE.

When adding a termination, you must specify:


• The VC3 connection between two 34M ports
• The NE at which you wish to add a termination
• The type of termination (action) you wish to add
• The port on which you wish to add a termination (action)

There are four types of termination you can add:


• Drop and Continue - traffic can be dropped from the source (End NE A)
while the signal is continued to other NE’s in the ring. For example, a
sample signal may be dropped without affecting the flow of signal traffic
to its final destination. You can add a Drop and Continue termination in
service as traffic is not affected.
• Drop - traffic can be dropped from the source (End NE A) on one or more
channels. For example, an additional drop may be added at the connection
endpoint (End NE Z) forming a multi-drop termination. You can add a
Drop termination in service as traffic is not affected.
• Break and Insert - traffic from the source (End NE A) can be broken and a
new signal inserted in its place. The original source signal is still available
to any of the NE’s between the source and the Break termination point. The
new signal inserted is available to the remaining NE’s between the Break
and Insert termination and the destination (End NE Z). For example, a
signal may not be required beyond a certain NE, at which point it can be
broken and a new signal inserted to make use of the available channel. You
cannot add a break and insert termination in service as traffic will be
affected.
• Break - traffic from the source (End NE A) can be broken and no new signal
inserted in its place. The original source signal is still available to any of
the NE’s between the source and the Break termination point. This renders
part of the VC3 connection redundant, however it remains active so that a
new signal may be inserted at any time (either at the Break point NE or
another NE further along the ring). For example, a signal may not be
required beyond a certain NE, at which point it can be broken and the
remaining section reserved for future use. You cannot add a break
termination in service as traffic will be affected.

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-31

CAUTION
Risk to equipment or loss of data
This procedure may affect any traffic being carried by the
connection. Ensure that the facilities are out of service before
you break or delete a VC3 connection. (See Provisioning and
Operations Procedures, 323-1211-310.)

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool. If you do not know
how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
6
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-32 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

2 In the main (Connection Manager) window, tab to the connections list area.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the VC3 connection on which you
wish to add a termination. Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Edit option and press spacebar
to select it.
The Edit VC-3 Connections dialogue is displayed.
FW01219A

Edit VC-3 Connections

Configuration > TN-16X Ring <


Connection ID vc3_2
VC-4 Pipe > pipe04 < Dir > G1 < VC-3 ch 2
End NE A 12 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2
End NE Z 13 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2

NE Action Tributary
U 12 Add 34M G13 Port 2
14 Drop 34M G13 Port 2

[ Add Termination ]
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-33

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

From this dialog, you can either select a termination to edit or display the add
termination dialog.
If you wish to Then
add a termination continue to the next step
delete a termination go to step 8.

3 To add a termination, tab to the Add Termination field and press Ctrl_A (or 0
on the numeric keypad).
The Add Termination dialogue is displayed.
FW01218A

Add Termination

NE < Trib:

Action Port

[ OK Return] [ Apply ] [ Cancel Del]

4 To add a termination, you must specify the NE at which you wish to add a
termination and the type of termination (action) you wish to add. 6
Tab to the NE field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/(or
Keypad 3). Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the NE you require
and press spacebar to select it.
Then, tab to the Action field and display the chooser menu by pressing Ctrl_L/
(or Keypad 3). Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the action you
require and press spacebar to select it.
Finally, Tab to the Port field and enter the tributary port number on which you
wish to add the termination (If you specify a Break action it is not necessary
to specify the port).
When you have made the necessary edits, tab to the OK button and press
Ctrl_A to return to the Edit VC3 Connections dialogue.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each VC3 connection you wish to edit.
6 To save the terminations you have added, tab to the OK button and press
Ctrl_A.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-34 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

If you have added a Break or Break and Insert action on any intermediate NE,
a warning and confirmation dialogue is displayed.
FW01222A

Adding and/or Deleting Break & Inserts

The addition and removal of Break & Inserts will create new
connection sections (add Break & Insert), and merge together
existing connection sections (remove Break & Insert).
Newly merged connections will use the Path Trace string for
the section source, whilst newly created sections will use the
previous sections Path Trace string.
Do you want the new sections created (add Break & Insert)
and/or merged (delete Break & Insert) to be Path Trace
enabled or disabled, or do you wish to cancel the edit ?

[ Enable ] [ Disable ] [ Cancel Edit]

7 If you want path trace changes to be made automatically for the terminations
you have added, tab to the Enable button and press Ctrl_A.
If you do not want path trace changes to be made automatically for the
terminations you have added, tab to the Disable button and press Ctrl_A.
This will disable path trace for both parts of the connection which must then
be provisioned manually (refer to Procedure 6-6).
If you want to cancel the terminations you have added, tab to the Cancel Edit
button and press Ctrl_A.
If you select the enable or disable, a final warning and confirmation dialogue
is displayed.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful. You are about to


edit this connection.

WARNING! This command will be service affecting if


the connection is carrying traffic.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

Tab to the Yes button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to save your edits and
exit the dialog. Proceed to Step 11
8 If you wish to delete a termination, tab to the connections list area in the Edit
VC3 Connections window. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the
connection you wish to edit. Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Delete option and press spacebar
to select it.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-35

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The highlighted VC3 termination is deleted.


FW01219B

Edit VC-3 Connections

Configuration > TN-16X Ring <


Connection ID vc3_2
VC-4 Pipe > pipe04 < Dir > G1 < VC-3 ch 2
End NE A 12 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2
End NE Z 13 < Trib: 34M G13 Port 2

NE Action Tributary
U 12 Add 34M G13 Port 2
13 Drop & Continue 34M G13 Port 2
14 Drop 1 Delete
34M G13 Port 2
2 Select
3 Deselect
4 Help
[ Add Termination ]
[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Using this dialog, you can delete any termination except the Add and Drop
Endpoints (NE A and NE Z).
9 Repeat step 8 for each VC3 termination you wish to delete.
10 To save the edits you have made, tab to the OK button and press Ctrl_A.
If you have deleted a Break or Break and Insert action on any intermediate
NE, a warning and confirmation dialogue is displayed. 6
If you want path trace changes to be made automatically for the terminations
you have deleted, tab to the Enable button and press Ctrl_A.
If you do not want path trace changes to be made automatically for the
terminations you have deleted, tab to the Disable button and press Ctrl_A.
This will disable path trace for the newly merged connection which must then
be provisioned manually (refer to Procedure 6-6)
If you want cancel the terminations you have added, tab to the Cancel Edit
button and press Ctrl_A.
If you select the enable or disable, a final warning and confirmation dialogue
is displayed.
FW00721A

Data validation was successful. You are about to


edit this connection.

WARNING! This command will be service affecting if


the connection is carrying traffic.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ NNo ♦ - ]

Tab to the Yes button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to save your edits and
exit the dialog.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-36 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-4
Adding and Deleting terminations to VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

11 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad
6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 8
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 6
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).

The tool is closed.


—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-37

Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections


Use this procedure to delete a connection between two network elements in
the OPC span of control. The connection is removed permanently from the
OPC and NE connection data.

If a configuration contains network elements in other OPC spans of control,


you must repeat this procedure for all OPCs.

Note: This procedure applies to both ring and linear configurations. On


linear systems, it is not necessary to delete VC3 connections prior to VC4
connections as VC3 connections on linear are configured automatically.

CAUTION
Risk to equipment or loss of data
This procedure affects any traffic being carried by the
connection. Ensure that the facilities are out of service before
you delete a VC3 connection. (See Provisioning and
Operations Procedures, 323-1211-310.)

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC 6
• read the tool restrictions and limitations at the beginning of this chapter
• read the command conventions for the type of user interface you are using
in Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
Procedure 6-5
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-38 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-5
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

2 Proceed according to the configuration:


If you wish to Then
delete a VC3 connection continue to the next step.
delete a VC4 pipe go to step 5

Part I - Deleting VC3 connections


3 In the main (Connection Manager) window, tab to the connections list area.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the connection you wish to delete.
Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the delete option and press spacebar
to select it.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-39

Procedure 6-5
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

A warning dialogue is displayed.


FW01224A

You are about to delete this connection.

Configuration : TN-16X Ring


Connection ID : c1
End NE A : 12
End NE Z : 14

Any traffic provisioned on this connection will be lost.

This connection also contains one or more intermediate


connection terminations. Traffic at all terminations
will be lost

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ]

Tab to the Yes button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to delete the VC3
connection and exit the dialog.
4 Repeat step 3 for each VC3 connection you wish to delete, then continue to
step 8.

5
Part II - Deleting VC4 pipes
In the main window, tab to the Manage VC-4 button and select it by pressing
6
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
The Manage VC-4 pipes dialogue is displayed.
FW01212A

Manage VC-4 Pipes

Configuration > R12 <

Pipe ID Channel ID
Pipe01 1
Pipe02 2
Pipe03 3

[ Done Return] [ Add +]

6 For ring configurations, tab to the window list area and use the arrow keys to
highlight the VC4 pipe you wish to delete. Select it by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
Press Ctrl_L (or Enter in the numeric keypad) to display the list item menu.
Use the arrow keys to scroll to the delete option and press spacebar to select
it.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-40 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-5
Deleting VC4 pipes and VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

A warning dialogue is displayed.


FW01224A

You are about to delete this connection.

Configuration : TN-16X Ring


Connection ID : c1
End NE A : 12
End NE Z : 14

Any traffic provisioned on this connection will be lost.

Do you wish to continue?

[Yes ¨♦ Return ] [ No ♦ - ]

Tab to the Yes button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to delete the VC4 pipe
and exit the dialog.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each VC4 pipe you wish to delete.
8 Close the Manage VC-4 Pipes dialogue by tabbing to the Done button and
press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
9 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad
6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 8
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 6
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


The tool is closed.
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-41

Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections


Use this procedure to provision path trace information for VC3 connections
on TN-16X systems. Path trace allows validation of individual 34M signals,
for example during node isolation. When path trace is provisioned for a VC3
connection, a unique identifier string is embedded in the 34M signal and a
copy sent to the destination node. If the arriving signal identifier does not
match the expected signal identifier, the signal is squelched and an alarm
indication signal is dropped instead.

When provisioning path trace, you must specify the VC3 termination point
from which the path trace ID starts. The start point must be the point at which
a signal is added, i.e., either End NE A or any Break & Insert termination point
Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 6-6
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections

Step Action 6
1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.
If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-42 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-6
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

2 In the main (Connection Manager) window, tab to the connections list area.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the connection on which you wish
to provision path trace. Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L (or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the VC3 Path Trace Provisioning
option and press spacebar to select it.
The VC3 Path Trace Provisioning screen is displayed
FW01225A
VC-3 Path Trace Provisioning

Connection ID : R12

NE Action Tributary P.T. Status


12 Add 34M G14 Port 1 Enabled
14 Drop & Continue 34M G13 Port 1 Enabled
13 Drop 34M G13 Port 1 Enabled

Path Trace Value : NE: 12 G14 1

[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Using this dialog, you can select the termination point from which you wish to
provision Path Trace.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-43

Procedure 6-6
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

3 At the VC3 path trace provisioning dialog, tab to the list area and use the up
and down arrow keys to scroll to the termination point you require.
Press 0 in the numeric keypad to highlight your choice and then press Enter
in the numeric keypad to display the list menu.
Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Enable option and press spacebar to select
it. Path trace is now provisioned between the add point and the endpoint (NE
Z) or the next Break termination point. A path trace value is assigned
automatically.
You can manually change the automatically assigned Path trace identifier if
required. With the relevant VC3 termination point highlighted, tab to the Path
Trace Value field. You can now overwrite the existing value.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each VC3 connection on which you wish to provision
path trace.
To save the provisioning details, tab to the OK button and press Ctrl_A (or
Keypad 0).
The Path Trace Provisioning Results screen is displayed.
FW01227A
VC-3 Path Trace Provisioning Results

NE
12
Action
Add
Tributary
34M G14 Port 1
P.T. Status
Updated at OPC and NE
6
14 Drop & Continue 34M G13 Port 1 Updated at OPC and NE
13 Drop 34M G13 Port 1 Updated at OPC and NE

[ OK Return]

4 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad
6).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-44 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-6
Provisioning path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The window menu is displayed.


FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 8
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 6
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


The tool is closed.
—end—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-45

Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections


Use this procedure to retrieve path trace information for VC3 connections on
TN-16X systems. When you retrieve path trace information, both the
expected and actual RX Path Trace identifiers are displayed.

The actual path trace is the value received at the signal drop point. The
expected value is the path trace identifier provisioned for the link, a copy of
which is stored at the destination NE.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 6-7
Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846 6
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-46 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-7
Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

2 In the main (Connection Manager) window, tab to the connections list area.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the connection on which you wish
to retrieve path trace. Highlight the connection by pressing Ctrl_A (or Keypad
0).
Display the list item menu by pressing Ctrl_L ( or Enter on the numeric
keypad). Use the arrow keys to scroll to the VC3 Path Trace Retrieval option
and press spacebar to select it.
The VC3 Path Trace Retrieval screen is displayed
FW01226A
VC-3 Path Trace Retrieval

Connection ID : R12

End NE A : 12 End NE Z : 13
NE Action Tributary P.T. Status
12 Add 34M G14 Port 1 Enabled
14 Drop & Continue 34M G13 Port 1 Enabled
13 Drop 34M G13 Port 1 Enabled

Expected RX Path Trace Value at NE : NE: 12 G14 1


Actual RX Path Trace Value at NE : NE: 12 G14 1
Path Trace Status at NE : Enabled

[ Done Return]

Using this dialog, you can select the termination point from which you wish to
retrieve Path Trace.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-47

Procedure 6-7
Retrieving path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

3 At the VC3 path trace retrieval dialog, tab to the list area and use the up and
down arrow keys to scroll to the termination point you require.
Press 0 in the numeric keypad to activate Path Trace Retrieval.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each VC3 connection on which you wish to retrieve
path trace.
When you have finished, tab to the Done button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad
0) to exit the dialog.
4 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad
6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by: End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4

first
second
12
12
12
13
STM1e
STM1e
STM1e
STM1e
G3
G5
G6
G1
14
13
13
12
STM1e
STM1e
STM1e
STM1e
G3
G5
G6
G1
8
6
7
1
6
13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]

C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


The tool is closed.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-48 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Auditing path trace for VC3 connections


Use this procedure to audit path trace information for VC3 connections on
TN-16X systems. When you audit path trace information, the Path Trace
status is displayed for each NE which contains a break point or final
termination point.

The actual path trace is the value received at the signal drop point. The
expected value is the path trace identifier provisioned for the link, a copy of
which is stored at the destination NE.

Requirements
To do this procedure, you must do the following:
• have a userID and password that allow you access to the OPC
• read the command conventions for the type of interface you are using in
Common Procedures, 323-1211-846

Procedure 6-8
Auditing path trace for VC3 connections

Step Action

1 Log in to the OPC and open the Connection Manager tool.


If you do not know how to do this, see Common Procedures, 323-1211-846
A dialogue is displayed, warning you about changing configuration data for
systems for which external provisioning is intended.
FW00714A

If you use an external provisioning interface (TL1


or OSI), the “Connection Manager” may conflict with
external provisioning requests. Please do not
change provisioning data for any configuration where
external provisioning is used.
Do you wish to continue?
[ Yes ♦Return ] [ N o ♦- ]

Tab to the Yes button and select it by pressing Crtl_A (or Keypad 0).
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-49

Procedure 6-8
Auditing path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

The warning dialogue closes and the Connection Manager main window is
displayed.
FW01211A

> . Connection Manager View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann

VC3_1 12 34M G13 1 14 34M G13 1 4


VC3_2 12 34M G13 2 14 34M G13 2 4

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ]


C 0 M 0 m 0 w 0 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

6
2 In the main (Connection Manager) window,either or go directly to the utilities
menu by pressing Ctrl_L- ,or display the global items menu by pressing 2 on
the numeric keypad and then use the up or down arrow keys to scroll to the
Utilities option which automatically displays the Utilities menu. Use the left or
right arrow keys to move to the Utilities menu and the up or down arrow keys
to scroll to the Path Trace Audit option. Press spacebar to select it.
The VC3 Path Trace Audit screen is displayed
FW01228A

VC-3 Path Trace Audit

Configuration : TN-16X 01
Network elements to audit:
Network Element Filter
12 Included
13
14 Drop & Continue
Included
14 Not Included
15 Included

[ OK Return] [ Cancel Del]

Using this dialog, you can specify the NEs you wish to include in the path
trace audit.
3 At the VC3 path trace audit dialog, tab to the list area and use the up and
down arrow keys to scroll to the NE you require.
Press 0 in the numeric keypad to highlight your choice and then pressCtrl_L
(or Enter in the numeric keypad) to display the list menu.
—continued—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-50 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Procedure 6-8
Auditing path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

Use the arrow keys to scroll to the Add or Remove option as required and
press spacebar to select it. If the current Filter status is ‘Included’, select the
remove option to exclude it. If the current Filter status is ‘Not included’, select
the add option to exclude it.
This feature allows you to exclude NEs at which there is not 34M termination
point (pass-through NEs). Repeat this operation for each NE as required.
When you have finished, tab to the OK button and press Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0)
to delete the VC3 connection and exit the dialog.
The VC3 Path Trace Audit Results screen is displayed.
FW01229A

VC-3 Path Trace Audit Results


Network elements audited:
Network Element Filter
12 Successful
13
14 Drop & Continue
Successful
15 Successful

[ Done Return] [ Update NEs from OPC]

This dialog displays the path trace audit results for each NE included in the
audit.
When you have finished viewing audit results, you can exit the dialog or
update the NE view. To exit the dialog, tab to the Done button and press
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
4 To update the NE view, tab to the Update NEs from OPC button and press
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0).
This allows you correct any inconsistencies between the OPC and NE
network views which may have occurred due to actions performed at the
OPC.
When you have performed the update, tab to the Done button and press
Ctrl_A (or Keypad 0) to exit the dialog.
—continued—

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC 6-51

Procedure 6-8
Auditing path trace for VC3 connections (continued)

Step Action

5 To close the tool, display the window menu by pressing Ctrl_L W (or Keypad
6).
The window menu is displayed.
FW00722A

> . Connection Manager 1 Exit( View Utilities

Connections sorted by End NE A


2 Help
Showing: All connections

Connection Id End NE A Tributary End NE Z Tributary Chann


fourth 12 STM1e G2 14 STM1e G8 4
12 STM1e G3 14 STM1e G3 8
12 STM1e G5 13 STM1e G5 6
12 STM1e G6 13 STM1e G6 7
first 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 1
second 13 STM1e G1 12 STM1e G1 2
third 13 STM1e G1 14 STM1e G7 3

[ Add ] [ Manage VC-4 ] [ Manage VC-3 ] 6


C 0 M 0 m 1 w 2 FailProt 0 Lckt 0 ActProt 0 PrfAlrt 0 15:35

Select the Exit command by pressing Space (or Keypad Enter).


The tool is closed.
—end—

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


6-52 Setting up VC4 pipes and VC3 connections using the OPC

Auditing 34M connection data


34M connection data is audited in the same way as other connection types.
Refer to Procedure 5-6, Scheduling an audit of connection data and
Procedure 5-1, in Chapter 5 of this guide for details.
end of chapter

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


7-1

Index 7-
140M facility STM-1e
loopback equipment 2-30
operate or release 3-71 facility 3-51
34Mbit/s STM-4o
connections equipment 2-32
adding 6-14
auditing immediately 6-52 C
auditing path trace 6-48 CI tools
displaying 6-7 connmap 5-61
provisioning path trace 6-41 nodemap 4-35
retrieving path trace 6-45 Circuit pack
scheduling an audit 6-52 listing all on a shelf 2-43
setting up 6-1 provisioning 1-2
Comm facility
A area address changing 3-28
Alarm points Comm port
ESI provisioning 3-58
equipment alarms 2-34 Common equipment alarms
external (environmental) alarms 2-30 hierarchy 2-28
OC-12 Comms network
equipment alarms 2-32 node list, displaying 3-9
STM-16 Comms port
facility alarms 3-55 performance statistics, displaying 3-7
STM-1e routing tables, displaying 3-8
equipment alarms 2-30 Configuration
Alarms displaying 3-2
common equipment 2-28 querying 3-37
defaults 1-1 two-fiber MS SPRing 4-1
equipment
STM-4o 2-32 D
ESI Data
equipment 2-34 synchronization between OPCs 5-7
timing reference facility alarms 3-52 Default
external (environmental) 2-30 alarms 1-1
facility provisioning 1-1
STM-4o 3-54 Defaults
local protection switching 1-7
environmental, hierarchy 2-28 DS1
provisioning 2-25, 3-46 LBO, changing 3-65

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


7-2 Index

E provisioning defaults
140M 1-6
Equipment (STM-16) procedures
alarms, provisioning 2-25 STM1 1-6
circuit pack STM-16 1-6
activating 2-12 Facility (STM-16) procedures
adding 2-16 alarms, provisioning 3-46
deactivating 2-12 configuration, querying 3-37
deleting 2-19 facility
querying 2-22 activating 3-10
circuit pack group, querying 2-22 adding 3-15
equipment status, displaying 2-3 deleting 3-20
External (environmental) alarm points 2-30 querying 3-37
External Synchronization Interface (ESI) identifier, changing 3-24
alarms, provisioning 3-46 performance alert status, querying 3-37
equipment 2-25 service state, querying 3-37
circuit pack signal-degrade threshold, changing 3-30
activating 2-12 status, displaying 3-2
adding 2-16
deactivating 2-12 H
deleting 2-19 Hierarchy
querying 2-22 alarms
circuit pack group, querying 2-22 common equipment 2-28
DS1 LBO, changing 3-65 environmental 2-28
equipment High performance transmitter (HPTx)
alarm points 2-34 circuit pack
status, displaying 2-3 activating or deactivating 2-12
facility provisioning defaults 1-5
activating 3-10 HPTx
querying 3-37 changing provisioned output power 2-47
status, displaying 3-2 Displaying power information 2-53
input timing reference source,
changing 3-69 I
timing distribution source, changing 3-67 Inventory 2-41
timing reference
facility alarm 3-52
frame format, changing 3-63
L
line-coding format, changing 3-61 Lamps
External synchronization interface (ESI) testing 2-45
provisioning defaults 1-5 Laser bias current (LBC) 1-9
timing reference Line build-out (LBO)
provisioning defaults 1-5 DS1
changing 3-65
Line coding
F displaying 3-2
Facility Loopback
alarms 140M facility 3-71
STM-16 3-55 STM-1e facility 3-71
STM-1e 3-51
procedures 3-1
selecting 3-42
M
provisioning 1-2 Maintenance Interface (MI)

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


Index 7-3

circuit pack
activating 2-12
R
Ring
adding 2-16 ADM node
deactivating 2-12 APS ID, editing 4-25
querying 2-22 ADMs (all)
equipment status, displaying 2-3 displaying in a configuration 4-3
MS SPRing configuration data
configuring 4-1 audit, scheduling 4-16
creating or upgrading 4-1 auditing for a selected ADM 4-11
auditing for all ADMs 4-7
O backup to OPC 4-21
Operations Controller (OPC) name, editing 4-32
circuit pack node map, editing 4-35
activating 2-12 Ring ADM node
adding 2-16 shelf
deactivating 2-12 equipment procedures 2-1
deleting 2-19
querying 2-22
data
S
Service state
synchronization 5-7 displaying 3-2
equipment status, displaying 2-3 querying 3-37
tools Shelf
Connection Manager 4-1, 5-1, 6-1 alarms
Optical amplifier provisioning 2-25
changing provisioned output power 2-47 circuit pack
circuit pack listing all 2-43
activating or deactivating 2-12 querying 2-22
Displaying power information 2-53 equipment status, displaying 2-3
Editing LOS inventory 2-41
Editing shutoff threshold 2-49 lamp test 2-45
Editing shutoff mode 2-51 position number, changing 2-46
provisioning defaults 1-5 Shelf Processor (SP)
Optical power (OP) 1-9 circuit pack
querying 2-22
P equipment status, displaying 2-3
Parallel telemetry 1-8 Signal-degrade threshold (140M),
Performance alerts setting 3-35
status, querying 3-37 Signal-degrade threshold (34Mbit/s, STM-1e),
Performance thresholds 1-9 setting 3-32
Ports Signal-degrade threshold, changing 3-30
user interface, provisioning 1-7 STM connections
Protection switching provisioning
defaults 1-7 defaults 1-6
Provisioning STM-1
circuit packs 1-2 alarms, provisioning 3-46
defaults 1-1 equipment 2-25
facilities 1-6 circuit pack
STM connections 1-6 activating 2-12
facilities 1-2 deactivating 2-12
user interface ports 1-7 deleting 2-19

TN-16X Provisioning and Operations Procedures


7-4 Index

querying 2-22
circuit pack group, querying 2-22
connections
backing up 5-57
setting up 5-1
equipment
alarm points 2-30
status, displaying 2-3
facility
activating 3-10
adding 3-15
deleting 3-20
identifier, changing 3-24
querying 3-37
signal-degrade threshold, setting 3-32
status, displaying 3-2
STM1e
circuit pack
adding 2-16
STM-1e facility
loopback
operate or release 3-71
STM-4o tributaries
equipment alarms
alarm points 2-32
definition 2-32

T
Thresholds 1-9
TN-16X NE
provisioning defaults 1-1

U
User interface
ports, provisioning 1-7

V
VC4e equipment procedures
mode change 2-6

323-1211-310 Release 4.2 Standard


International Broadband Networks (Dept18600)
Nortel Limited
Oakleigh Road South
London, N11 1HB
So far as Nortel Limited is aware the contents of this document
are correct. However, such contents have been obtained from a
variety of sources and Northern Telecom can give no warranty or
undertaking and make no representation as to their accuracy. In
particular, Northern Telecom hereby expressly excludes liability
for any form of consequential, indirect or special loss, and loss of
data, loss of profits or loss of business opportunity, howsoever
arising and whether sustained by the user of the information
herein or any third party arising out of the contents of this
document.
SDH Transmission

TN-16X
Provisioning and Operations Procedures

Copyright  1994 - 1997 Northern Telecom

The copyright of this document is the property of Northern


Telecom. Without the written consent of Northern Telecom, given
by contract or otherwise, this document must not be copied,
reprinted or reproduced in any material form, either wholly or in
part, and the contents of this document, or any methods or
techniques available therefrom, must not be disclosed to any
other person whatsoever.
NORTHEN TELECOM CONFIDENTIAL: The information
contained in this document is the property of Northern Telecom.
Except as specifically authorized in writing by Northern Telecom,
the holder of this document shall protect same in whole or in part
from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use same
for evaluation, operation, and maintenance purposes only.
Document number: 323-1211-310
Document issue: Release 4.2
Document Status: Standard
Date: March 1997
Printed in England

You might also like